JP6956435B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table characterized by notification by a notification means. SOLUTION: A game table notifying means indicates a first stop operation condition when a first lottery result having the same probability of internal winning is derived from any of a plurality of types of set values. When a second lottery result is derived, in which the notification of the above can be performed in a predetermined notification mode and the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values, the first stop operation is performed. The second notification indicating the condition can be notified in the predetermined notification mode. Further, the notification means determines the execution frequency of the first notification when the condition for reducing the frequency of notification execution, which is satisfied in at least a part of the case where the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not performed, is satisfied. At the same time, the execution frequency of the second notification is reduced. [Selection diagram] FIG. 19

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. Some such slot machines are provided with a notification means for performing push-order navigation during ART (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-73461

However, there is room for improvement in the push order navigation by the notification means in the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by notification by a notification means.

The game console according to the present invention is set to set one of a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player. Means, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination based on the set value set and deriving the lottery result, and a stop operation means capable of a stop operation for stopping and displaying the variable display unit. A stop control means that controls the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means, and a game value granting that can give a game value based on the display result derived to the variable display unit. A game table including means and a notification means capable of notifying information indicating a stop operation condition of the stop operation means, and the lottery result includes a probability of internal winning of any of the plurality of types of set values. The first lottery result in which is the same and the second lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values are included, and the stop control means is the first. When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition in the game in which one lottery result is derived, the first display result is derived to the variable display unit, and the first lottery result is derived. When the stop operation means is operated according to a second stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition in the game, the variable display unit displays a second display different from the first display result. When the stop operation means is operated in the game in which the result is derived and the second lottery result is derived, the first display result is displayed on the variable display unit regardless of the stop operation condition of the stop operation means. The notification means can notify the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition in a predetermined notification mode when the first lottery result is derived. When the second lottery result is derived, the second notification indicating the first stop operation condition can be notified in the predetermined notification mode, and the notification means is a notification by the notification means. When the notification execution frequency reduction condition that is satisfied at least in a part when the stop operation according to the above is not performed, the execution frequency of the first notification is reduced and the execution frequency of the second notification is reduced. Ri means der to reduce the, the notification unit, when the notification execution frequency reduction condition is satisfied, with reducing the execution frequency of the first notification to the first frequency, the execution of the second notification It is a means of reducing the frequency to a second frequency that is lower than the first frequency. It is a featured game console.

According to the game console according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by notification by a notification means.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of the winning line of a slot machine 100. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the name of the condition device, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and the remarks. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system in the slot machine 100. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system and the bonus system in the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the name of the condition device, the combination of the winning combination which constitutes the condition device, and the display combination by push order. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification of the condition apparatus explained using (a). (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the winning combination in the re-game low probability state (RT0). (B) It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the winning combination in the special combination 1 and 2 game state (RT1). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT first hit lottery table. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT set addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the condition device, mode, 7-segment data, and remarks. (A) It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the 7-segment data and the display mode (lighting mode) of the payout number display 127. (B) It is a figure which shows the outline of the push order effect of a sub-control unit at the time of receiving a 7-segment data command which shows 7-segment data SEG1-6 selection. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the prize-winning combination internal lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the CZ transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the push order flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT mode push order flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special AT mode push order flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of instruction monitor display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the internal lottery command transmission request processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the compensation difference number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game state control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of mode update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT mode update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special AT mode update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the advantageous section end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode transition at the time of not transitioning from AT mode to special AT mode. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode transition at the time of transitioning from AT mode to special AT mode. (C) It is a figure which compared the change of the number of medals acquired when it did not shift to the special AT mode shown in (a), and the change of the number of medals won when it shifted to the special AT mode shown by (b). It is a figure for demonstrating another end condition of a special AT mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display result at the time of winning a prize in a small winning combination 4 to a small winning combination 9. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the push order navigation in AT mode. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the push order navigation in a special AT mode. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system and the bonus system in the slot machine according to the second embodiment, and is a modification of the transition diagram of the game state of the AT system and the bonus system described with reference to FIG. 7. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the compensation difference number counter update processing which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a modification of the compensation difference number counter update processing described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT mode update process which concerns on this Embodiment 2, and is a modification of the AT mode update process described with reference to FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special AT mode update process which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a modification of the special AT mode update process described with reference to FIG. 28. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode transition at the time of not shifting from the AT mode to the special AT mode, and is the same figure as FIG. 33 (a). (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode transition at the time of shifting (returning) to AT mode after shifting from AT mode to special AT mode. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout (number of grants) of each winning combination, and the remarks. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is a figure which shows typically the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the transition of the gaming state of a slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the first chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (B) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the second chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (C) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state, and the winning probability of a set continuation lottery. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in a non-AT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state). (C) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state). It is a figure which showed the display example of the navigation count counter. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the execution period and the non-execution period of the navigation. It is a figure which showed an example of (b) to (e) various notifications. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the mode in a normal state, and the count value of the navigation count counter 2 corresponding to each mode. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the navigation compliance rate and the lottery value of each mode. It is a figure which showed the modification of the display of the navigation count counter. It is a figure which showed the modification of the execution period of navigation. It is a figure which showed the modification of the navigation. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the AT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT end screen displayed in the AT extension period. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout (number of grants) of each winning combination, and the remarks. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the game state of the AT system. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (1) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (C) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (2) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (A) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (3) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example of the ending when the operation navigation was ignored. (C) It is a figure which showed the specific example of the bell hitting production. It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (4) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. It is a figure which showed the specific example of (A), (B) advantageous section control (5) when operation navigation was ignored. (C) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the AT state in chronological order. (D) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game in the AT state in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the advantageous section control at the time of ignoring the operation navigation. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the advantageous section control at the time of ignoring the operation navigation.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
Hereinafter, the game console (slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110-112 (see FIG. 4). ). From the player's point of view, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. There is.

Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the optical sensor is projected. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, special role 1 or special role 2) in the internal lottery described later, or during a bonus game (special role shown in FIG. 6). It is a lamp that informs the player that the player is in the 1st or 2nd game state. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The effect button 156 is an operation means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the buttons are composed of buttons that can be pressed by the player, and are used for various effects. The operating means used for such an effect is not limited to the buttons, and may be configured by, for example, a lever, a touch panel, or the like, or may be provided with a plurality of operating means.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and can also be used as an instruction monitor (details will be described later) for performing a push order effect. It will be used. In this example, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "1 stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "2 stop" or "second stop") and the last stop operation are referred to as a third stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "3 stop" or "third stop").

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or push order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) Left → middle → right operation order (left middle right or LCR), (2) left → right → middle operation order (left and right middle or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order (3) Middle left / right or CLR), (4) Middle → right → left operation order (middle right / left or CRL), (5) Right → left → middle operation order (right / left middle or RLC), (6) Right → middle → left There are 6 types of operation order (right, middle, left, or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160.

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Winning line and production line>
Next, the winning line and the production line will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line of the slot machine 100.

As described with reference to FIG. 1, three symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112 when viewed from the player. A total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the upper design of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position). The symbol displayed on the left reel (also referred to as 2) is referred to as the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is referred to as the left reel lower symbol.

Further, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 4) is referred to as the upper design of the middle reel and the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5). The symbol displayed in) is referred to as a middle reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is referred to as a middle reel lower symbol.

Further, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) is referred to as the upper symbol on the right reel and the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8). The symbol displayed in) is referred to as the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 9) is referred to as the lower symbol on the right reel.

In the present embodiment, as a winning line, a middle-stage winning line L1 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a symbol position 8) composed of a left reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 2), a middle-reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 5), and a right-reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 8). Only "winning line L1") is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIG. 5 is displayed. It is a line that determines whether or not it is aligned. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a dedicated machine for betting three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, no winning line is valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 Is enabled. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. Hereinafter, among the symbol display windows 113, the symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 are "winning positions", and the other symbol positions, that is, the symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 are "non-". It may be called "winning position". That is, the winning position means a position on the winning line and at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, the upper winning line composed of the left reel upper symbol, the middle reel upper symbol and the right reel upper symbol, the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel lower symbol and the right reel lower symbol are composed. A total of three lower winning lines may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the effect lines, the upper effect line L2 composed of the symbol positions 1, 4 and 7, the lower effect line L3 composed of the symbol positions 3, 6 and 9, and the symbol positions 1, 5 A total of 5 lines: a downward-sloping effect line L4 composed of, 9 and an upward-sloping effect line L5 composed of symbol positions 3, 5 and 7, and an Oyama production line L6 composed of symbol positions 3, 5 and 9. Is provided.

Here, the production line is a line provided separately from the winning line, and is a line used for production using a symbol.

Further, the number of production lines is not limited to 5, and may be composed of a total of 4 lines L2 to L5 excluding the Koyama production line L6, or at symbol positions 1, 5 and 7. It may be composed of a total of 6 lines including a small V effect line.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. A ROM 306 for storing the position and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring the time and the number of times. , WDT (Watchdog Timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number value generation circuit 316 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a is received (this circuit contains two random number value generation circuits). The CPU 304 is provided with a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal when the start-up signal is input from the start-up signal output circuit 338. Game control is started (main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

The random number value generation circuit 316 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of methods for generating a random number value in the random number value generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using the seed of the random number value, and derive the operation result as a random number value. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number value. The random number value generation circuit 316 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number value generation circuit 316 uses the value acquired in this way as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of a random number value, or determines a read start position of a random number table. Use.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 The state of the sensor, the optical sensor of the reel 111, the optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the closing operation when doing so. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and the light-shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. A drive circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and an external hall computer (not shown) or the like is connected to the main control unit 300 via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. It is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface and an operation of pressing the effect button 156. Is connected to the effect button sensor 430 that can detect the above. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter, also referred to as “liquid crystal display device 157”). The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a plan showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plan-like manner.

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (9 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. .. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 0 frame on the left reel 110 is a "watermelon symbol", the number 1 frame on the middle reel 111 is a "bell symbol", and the number 0 frame on the right reel 112 is a "replay symbol". "Is arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the names of the conditional devices, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and remarks.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 11). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-gaming role is a role in which the re-gaming is possible without inserting a new medal (a role in which the re-game is given). These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line L1, for example, the special combination 1 , Special role 2, and winning a replay role.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are prize-winning roles in which the gaming state shifts to the special role 1 and 2 gaming state (RT1) by winning a prize. When the number of medals exceeding the specified number (200 in this example) is paid out in the special role 1 and 2 game state (RT1), the game state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT0).

The symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol", and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2 (RB) is "Seven 2 symbol-Seven 2 symbol". -Seven 2 design ".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will be displayed. It will be easy to win a prize.

The re-game combination is a winning combination (acting role) that allows the player to play the game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol". The re-game combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the re-game combination, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area), or the re-game combination may be won. The medals inserted in the previous game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

The small winning combination 1 to the small winning combination 11 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a number of payouts).

The small winning combination 1 (cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and one medal is paid out. The symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" may be any symbol as long as the symbol of the left reel 110 is "cherry symbol", and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol. ..

The small winning combination 2 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "bell symbol-watermelon symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and one medal is paid out. The small winning combination 3 (chance eye) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "bell symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and one medal is paid out.

In the small role 4 (Fr1), the symbol combination of "replay symbol-replay symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" (hereinafter referred to as "bell symbol"). , It may be simply referred to as "bell-matched symbol combination"), which is a winning combination in which 10 medals are paid out with a stop display on the upper production line L2, and thereafter, it may be simply referred to as "upper bell".

In the small role 5 (Fr2), the symbol combination of "replay symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" (bell). The matching pattern combination) is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4, and 10 medals are paid out as a winning combination.

Small role 6 (Fr3) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and 10 medals are paid out. Sometimes called "bell".

In the small role 7 (Fr4), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-bell symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" (bell). The matching pattern combination) is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effect line L5, and 10 medals are paid out as a winning combination.

In the small role 8 (Fr5), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" (bell). The matching pattern combination) is stopped and displayed on the lower production line L3, and 10 medals are paid out as a winning combination. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as a "lower bell".

In the small role 9 (Fr6), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" (bell). The matching pattern combination) is stopped and displayed on the Koyama production line L6, and 10 medals are paid out as a winning combination. Hereinafter, it may be simply called "Koyama bell".

The small winning combination 10 (Fr7) and the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) are not the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, and are stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 when the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are not available, that is, in the case of non-winning. It is a symbol combination (spilled eye) that may be played, and when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, one medal is paid out.

In this example, the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) are "replay symbol-replay symbol-seven 1 symbol", "replay symbol-replay symbol-seven 2 symbol", and "replay symbol-replay symbol-blank 1". It is either "symbol" or "replay symbol-replay symbol-BAR symbol", and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) is only "bell symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol".

<Types of RT-type game states>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the types and transitions of the RT-type gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system in the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a re-game low probability state (RT0) and a special combination 1 and 2 game state (RT1). In the present embodiment, the gaming state roughly divided into these two is referred to as an RT-type gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 will be described later with reference to FIG. 7.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
The re-game low probability state (RT0) is a default RT-type game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on, and is for the player. It is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to other gaming states.

FIG. 6 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 in the re-game low probability state (RT0) (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won). ) Indicates that the player shifts to the special combination 1 and 2 gaming state (RT1) described later. In this example, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the re-game low probability state (RT0) is maintained.

<Special role 1 and 2 game state (RT1)>
The special role 1 and 2 gaming states (RT1) are the gaming states that are most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states.

FIG. 6 shows that in the special combination 1 and 2 game state (RT1), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT0). In this example, when the special role 1 or 2 game state (RT1) is entered based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2, 200 or more medals are paid out. When it is finished, it shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT0).

In the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and 2 gaming state (RT1) ends when the specified number of cards is paid out, but for example, the game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won. Further, the game may be terminated when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) of winnings have been made, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) of games have been played.

<Types of AT and bonus game states (modes)>
Next, the types and transitions of the AT system and bonus system game states (modes) in the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the game states of the AT system and the bonus system in the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal mode, a CZ mode, an AT mode, a special AT mode, and a bonus mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls the state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (AT system game state), and the main control unit 300 determines the AT system game state. 1 The sub-control unit 400 is configured to set the game state. Hereinafter, the gaming states of the AT system and the bonus system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal mode>
The normal mode is a default AT-type gaming state that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on or the like. FIG. 7 shows that in the normal mode, when the predetermined specific condition A is satisfied (in this example, when the CZ right is acquired), the mode shifts to the CZ mode.

In addition, when the predetermined specific condition G is satisfied (in this example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (or special combination 2) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1), a bonus described later will be given. Move to mode.

<CZ mode>
The CZ mode is a gaming state in which a predetermined number of games (32G in this example) can be executed, and an AT right can be acquired and the game can be shifted to the AT mode.

In FIG. 7, when the predetermined specific condition C is satisfied (in this example, when the AT right is acquired during the CZ mode), the mode shifts to the AT mode and the predetermined specific condition B is satisfied. In this case (in this example, there is no remaining game in CZ mode), it is shown that the mode shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, when the predetermined specific condition G is satisfied (in this example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (or special combination 2) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1), a bonus described later will be given. Move to mode.

<AT mode>
The AT mode is a game state in which a predetermined number of games (30 G per set in this example) of AT games can be executed, and a game state in which the transition to the special AT mode is possible.

In FIG. 7, when the predetermined specific condition E is satisfied (in this example, the condition that there is no remaining game in AT mode & no stock of AT right & there is a compensation difference number is satisfied), the special AT mode is satisfied. If the specified condition D is satisfied (in this example, there is no remaining game in AT mode & no stock of AT right & no compensation difference number), the mode is changed to CZ mode. It is shown to do.

In addition, when the predetermined specific condition G is satisfied (in this example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (or special combination 2) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1), a bonus described later will be given. Move to mode.

<Special AT mode>
The special AT mode is a gaming state in which at least a part of medals (game value) that could not be acquired in the AT mode can be acquired (details will be described later).

FIG. 7 shows that when the predetermined specific condition F is satisfied (in this example, when the compensation difference number is acquired during the special AT mode), the mode shifts to the CZ mode.

In addition, when the predetermined specific condition G is satisfied (in this example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (or special combination 2) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1), a bonus described later will be given. Move to mode.

<Bonus mode>
The bonus mode is a state in which the RT-type game state shifts to the special role 1 and 2 game states (RT1), and the bonus game is being executed.

FIG. 7 shows that when the predetermined specific condition H is satisfied (in this example, when the specified number of medals or more is paid out), the mode shifts to the AT mode.

<Condition device>
Next, the condition device included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a name of the condition device, a combination of winning combinations constituting the condition device, and a display combination according to the push order.

<Condition device / BB1, BB2>
When the BB1 "special combination 1" is internally won, the winning line is a combination of symbols corresponding to BB1 or loss, regardless of the operation order (pushing order) of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Stop is displayed on L1.

When the BB2 "Special Role 2" is internally won, the winning line is a combination of symbols corresponding to BB2 or loss, regardless of the operation order (push order) of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Stop is displayed on L1.

<Condition device / Replay>
When the replay "replay combination" is internally won, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 regardless of the operation order (push order) and operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Will be done.

<Condition device / cherry, watermelon, chance eye>
When the cherry "small role 1" is internally won, the winning line is a combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry or the loss, depending on the operation timing, regardless of the operation order (push order) of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Stop is displayed on L1.

When the watermelon "Small role 2" is internally won, the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 regardless of the operation order (pushing order) and operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Will be done.

When the chance eye "Small role 3" is internally won, the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is on the winning line L1 regardless of the operation order (push order) and operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Stop is displayed.

<Condition device / common bell>
When the common bell "small winning combination 4 to 9" is internally won, the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) is changed according to the operation order (pushing order) of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Any one of the corresponding symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

As a specific example, when the common bell "small winning combination 4 to 9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the LCR, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) with 10 payouts is obtained. Along with being displayed on the winning line L1, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper production line L2.

If the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing the LRC, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) with 10 payouts will be on the winning line L1. At the same time, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4.

If the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the CLR, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) with 10 payouts (bell-matched symbol combination) Is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

If the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the CRL, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) with 10 payouts is placed on the winning line L1. Along with the stop display, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effect line L5.

If the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing RLC, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) with 10 payouts will be on the winning line L1. Along with the stop display, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower effect line L3.

If the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing RCL, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) with 10 payouts is placed on the winning line L1. Along with the stop display, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the Koyama production line L6.

<Condition device / Push order bell LCR>
When the push order bell LCR "small winning combination 4, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell LCR "small winning combination 4, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LCR in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2.

In addition, the push order bell LCR "small winning combination 4, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LRC in this example) is followed. When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout is displayed as a stop on the winning line L1 and inside the push order bell LCR "small winning combination 4, 10, 11". If the player wins and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Push order bell LRC>
When the push order bell LRC "small winning combination 5, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell LRC "small winning combination 5, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LRC in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4.

In addition, the push order bell LRC "small winning combination 5, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LCR in this example) is followed. When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout is displayed as a stop on the winning line L1 and inside the push order bell LRC "small winning combination 5, 10, 11". If the player wins and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Push order bell CLR>
When the push order bell CLR "small winning combination 6, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell CLR "small winning combination 6, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CLR in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination (bell-aligned symbol combination) corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

In addition, the push order bell CLR "small winning combination 6, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, LCR, LRC). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout number is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the push order bell CLR "small winning combination 6, 10, 11" is displayed. If the player is internally elected and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CRL, RLC, RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Push order bell CRL>
When the push order bell CRL "small winning combination 7, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell CRL "small winning combination 7, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CRL in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effect line L5.

In addition, the push order bell CRL "small winning combination 7, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LCR, LRC in this example). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout number is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the push order bell CRL "small winning combination 7, 10, 11" is displayed. If the player is internally elected and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CLR, RLC, RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Push order bell RLC>
When the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 8, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 8, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RLC in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower effect line L3.

In addition, the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 8, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, LCR, LRC). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout number is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 8, 10, 11" is displayed. If the player is internally elected and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CLR, CRL, RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Push order bell RCL>
When the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 9, 10, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is decided.

As a specific example, if the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 9, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RCL in this example), the number of payouts is 10. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the Koyama effect line L6.

In addition, the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 9, 10, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, LCR, LRC). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout number is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 9, 10, 11" is displayed. If the player is internally elected and the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect operation order (CLR, CRL, RLC in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout is won. A stop is displayed on the line L1.

<Condition device / Special bell LCR>
When the special bell LCR "small winning combination 5-10" is internally won, it is determined which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Will be done.

As a specific example, if the special bell LCR "small winning combination 5 to 10" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LCR in this example), the number of payouts is one small. The symbol combination corresponding to the combination 10 (Fr7) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell LCR "small combination 5 to 10" is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LRC in this example) among the plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. If so, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4.

In addition, the special bell LCR "small combination 5 to 10" is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (CLR in this example) among the plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. If so, the symbol combination (bell-aligned symbol combination) corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

In addition, the special bell LCR "small combination 5 to 10" is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (CRL in this example) among the plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. If so, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the right-up effect line L5.

In addition, the special bell LCR "small combination 5 to 10" is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (RLC in this example) among the plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. If so, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower effect line L3.

In addition, the special bell LCR "small combination 5 to 10" is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (RCL in this example) among the plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. If so, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the Koyama effect line L6.

<Condition device / Special bell LRC>
When the special bell LRC "small winning combination 4, 6 to 10" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is determined.

As a specific example, if the special bell LRC "small winning combination 4, 6-10" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LRC in this example), the number of payouts is one. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell LRC "Small combination 4, 6 to 10" is internally won and stopped according to a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LCR in this example) among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. When the operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2. ..

Note that the case where the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL in this example) is the same as the special bell LCR "small winning combination 5 to 10", so the explanation is given. Omit.

<Condition device / Special bell CLR>
When the special bell CLR "small winning combination 4, 5, 7-9, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. It is decided whether or not to do so.

As a specific example, when the special bell CLR "small winning combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CLR in this example), the stop operation is performed. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout number is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to the LCR), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed on the upper production line L2. Stop is displayed.

In addition, the special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to the LRC), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4. Is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to CRL), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is raised to the right on the production line L5. Is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to RLC), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed on the lower production line L3. Stop is displayed.

In addition, the special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to the RCL), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed on the Koyama production line L6. Stop is displayed.

<Condition device / Special bell CRL>
When the special bell CRL "small winning combination 4 to 6, 8, 9, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. It is decided whether or not to do so.

As a specific example, when the special bell CRL "small winning combination 4 to 6, 8, 9, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CRL in this example), the stop operation is performed. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout number is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell CRL "small winning combination 4 to 6, 8, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, When the stop operation is performed according to the CLR), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

In addition, when the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (LCR, LRC, RLC, RCL in this example), it is the same as the special bell CLR "small winning combination 4, 5, 7-9, 11". Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Condition device / Special bell RLC>
When the special bell RLC "small winning combination 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Whether or not is decided.

As a specific example, if the special bell RLC "small winning combination 4-7, 9, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RLC in this example), the number of payouts The symbol combination corresponding to one small winning combination 11 (Fr8) is stopped and displayed. The "correct answer operation order" and "incorrect answer operation order" in the present specification are names for convenience of explanation, and do not mean to limit the superiority or inferiority of the operation order of the stop operation means.

In addition, the special bell RLC "small combinations 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LCR in this example). When the stop operation is performed according to the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2. Will be done.

In addition, the special bell RLC "small combination 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LRC in this example). When the stop operation is performed according to the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped at the downward-sloping effect line L4. Is displayed.

In addition, the special bell RLC "small combination 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (CLR in this example). When the stop operation is performed according to the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) with 10 payouts is displayed and stopped on the winning line L1.

In addition, the special bell RLC "small combination 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (CRL in this example). When the stop operation is performed according to the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) with 10 payouts is stopped displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped at the upward-sloping effect line L5. Is displayed.

In addition, the special bell RLC "small combination 4 to 7, 9, 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (RCL in this example). When the stop operation is performed according to the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

<Condition device / Special bell RCL>
When the special bell RCL "small wins 4 to 8 and 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is determined.

As a specific example, if the special bell RCL "small winning combination 4-8, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RCL in this example), the number of payouts is one. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special bell RCL "small combinations 4 to 8 and 11" is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, the game is stopped according to a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (RLC in this example). When the operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) with 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower effect line L3. ..

In addition, when the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL in this example), it is the same as the special bell RLC "small winning combination 4-7, 9, 11". , The description is omitted.

<Condition device / Modification example>
FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a modified example of the condition device described with reference to FIG. 8A, showing the name of the condition device, the combination of winning combinations constituting the condition device, and the display combination according to the push order. It is a figure which shows.

In the condition device described with reference to FIG. 8A, an example in which six types of special bells LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL are provided as special bells is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Special bells L, C, R may be used.

In this example, when the special bell L "small winning combination 6 to 10" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Whether or not is decided.

In a specific example, when the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LCR or LRC in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 (Fr7) with one payout number is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

Note that the case where the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL in this example) is the same as the special bell LCR "small winning combination 5 to 10", so the explanation is given. Omit.

In addition, when the special bell C "small winning combination 4, 5, 8, 9, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination stops at the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Whether or not it is displayed is determined.

In a specific example, when the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CLR or CRL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout number is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

In addition, when the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (LCR, LRC, RLC, RCL in this example), it is the same as the special bell CLR "small winning combination 4, 5, 7 to 9, 11". Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the special bell R "small winning combination 4 to 7, 11" is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. Whether or not is decided.

In a specific example, when the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RLC or RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 (Fr8) with one payout number is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

In addition, when the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order (LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL in this example), it is the same as the special bell RLC "small winning combination 4-7, 9, 11". , The description is omitted.

<Lottery table>
Next, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B.

FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a lottery table of winning combinations in the re-game low probability state (RT0), and FIG. 9B is a drawing table of winning combinations in the special combination 1 and 2 gaming states (RT1). It is a figure which shows.

In the re-game low probability state (RT0), the internal lottery of the condition device is performed with reference to the lottery table shown in FIG. 9A. The condition device capable of internal winning in the re-game low probability 1 state (RT0) is as shown in the figure.

Among the condition devices that can be internally won in the re-game low probability 1 state (RT0), at least one lottery value is different for BB1, BB2, replay, cherry, watermelon, chance eye, and common bell depending on the set value. (So that the winning probability is different). On the other hand, the push order bells LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL and special bells LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL have the same lottery value regardless of the set value (the winning probability is the same). (To be).

Further, in the special role 1 and 2 game state (RT1), the internal lottery of the condition device is performed with reference to the lottery table shown in FIG. 9B. The common bell is the only condition device that can be internally elected in the special role 1 and 2 game state (RT1).

In each lottery table, the horizontal axis represents the set value (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value provided for each condition device corresponding to each set value. In this example, settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. The lottery value in this example is an example and is not limited to this lottery value.

The lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and the randomness obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery process of the winning combination in which each numerical range is associated with each condition device or loss. It is determined whether or not the numerical value corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any of the conditional devices, and the internal lottery combination is determined.

The internal winning probability of the condition device is obtained by dividing the lottery value corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each condition device by the numerical value in the range of random numbers acquired at the time of the internal lottery (for example, 65536). Be done.

For example, in setting 1 of the replay low probability state (RT0), since the lottery value corresponding to the replay is 9727, the internal winning probability of the replay is 9727/65536 × 100 ≈ 14.8%. Further, in the special role 1 and 2 game state (RT1), since the lottery value corresponding to the common bell is 65536 in all the set values, the internal winning probability of the common bell is 65536 / regardless of the set value. 65536 x 100 = 100%.

If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be stopped and displayed. Further, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line L1 may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

<AT first hit lottery table>
Next, the AT first hit lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (a). FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of an AT first hit lottery table.

In the AT first hit lottery described later, a lottery for whether or not to grant the AT right is performed with reference to the AT first hit lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this example, the conditional devices that are subject to the AT first hit lottery are small win 1 (cherry), small win 2 (watermelon), and small win 3 (chance eye), and one of these conditional devices is internally won. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game, the AT first hit lottery is executed. The conditional device that is the target of the AT first hit lottery is not limited to this example.

In the AT first hit lottery table, the horizontal axis represents the set value (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value provided for each condition device corresponding to each set value. The lottery value in this example is an example and is not limited to this lottery value.

The lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each condition device and loss. As a result of executing the AT first hit lottery, it is determined whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any of the conditional devices, and it is determined whether or not to grant the AT right. ..

The winning probability of the first AT hit is a value obtained by dividing the lottery value corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each condition device by the numerical value (for example, 256) of the range of random numbers acquired at the time of the first hit lottery of AT. Is required by. For example, in setting 1, since the lottery value corresponding to the cherry is 25, the winning probability of the AT first hit lottery in the game in which the cherry is internally won is 25/256 × 100 ≈ 9.8%.

<AT set addition lottery table>
Next, the AT set addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of an AT set addition lottery table.

In the AT set addition lottery described later, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to grant the AT set (1 set = 30G in this example) with reference to the AT set addition lottery table shown in FIG. 10B. In this example, the conditional devices to be added to the AT set lottery are small winning combination 1 (cherry), small winning combination 2 (watermelon), and small winning combination 3 (chance eye), and any of these conditional devices is internally won. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game, the AT set addition lottery is executed. The conditional device that is the target of the AT set addition lottery is not limited to this example.

In the AT set addition lottery table, the horizontal axis represents the set value (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value provided for each condition device corresponding to each set value. The lottery value in this example is an example and is not limited to this lottery value.

The lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each condition device and loss. As a result of executing the AT set addition lottery, it is determined whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any of the conditional devices, and it is determined whether or not to give the AT set. ..

The winning probability of the AT set addition lottery is obtained by dividing the lottery value corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each condition device by the numerical value of the random number value range acquired at the time of the AT set addition lottery (for example, 256). Obtained by value. For example, in setting 1, since the lottery value corresponding to the cherry is 102, the winning probability of the AT set addition lottery in the game in which the cherry is internally won is 102/256 × 100 ≈39.8%.

<Pushing order effect of main control unit (operation condition notification effect)>
Next, the push order effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “push order navigation”) of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (a).

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a condition device, a mode, 7-segment data, and remarks, and FIG. 12 (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the 7-segment data and the display mode (lighting mode) of the payout number display 127.

The push order effect of the main control unit 300 of the present embodiment is performed by using the payout number display 127 (hereinafter, also referred to as “instruction monitor”) of the 7-segment (SEG) display. Therefore, the effect data of the push order effect of the main control unit 300 is the lighting pattern data of the 7-segment (SEG) display (hereinafter referred to as 7-segment data).

<Pushing order production of main control unit / common bell>
In the AT mode, when the common bell is internally elected, SEG1 suggesting the operation order of LCR, SEG2 suggesting the operation order of LRC, SEG3 suggesting the operation order of CLR, and SEG4 suggesting the operation order of CRL. The 7-segment data of either SEG5, which suggests the operation order of RLC, or SEG6, which suggests the operation order of RLC, is selected by a common bell push order distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

Here, the display mode of the 7-segment data SEG1 to 6 in the payout number display 127 is as shown in FIG. 12 (a). The player can visually grasp the correct operation order from the lighting mode of the payout number display 127.

In the normal mode, CZ mode, and special AT mode, the push order effect corresponding to the common bell is not executed.

<Pushing order production of main control unit / Pushing order bell>
In AT mode or special AT mode, when the push order bell LCR is internally won, the 7-segment data SEG1 suggesting the correct operation order (LCR) is selected, and when the push order bell LRC is internally won, the correct answer operation is performed. The 7-segment data SEG2, which suggests the order (LRC), is selected.

Further, in the AT mode or the special AT mode, when the push order bell CLR is internally won, the 7-segment data SEG3 suggesting the correct operation order (CLR) is selected, and when the push order bell CRL is internally won, the 7-segment data SEG3 is selected. The 7-segment data SEG4, which suggests the correct operation sequence (CRL), is selected.

Further, in the AT mode or the special AT mode, when the push order bell RLC is internally won, the 7-segment data SEG5 suggesting the correct operation order (RLC) is selected, and when the push order bell RLC is internally won, the 7-segment data SEG5 is selected. The 7-segment data SEG6, which suggests the correct operation order (RCL), is selected.

In the normal mode and the CZ mode, the push order effect corresponding to the push order bell is not executed.

<Pushing order of main control / special bell>
When the special bell LCR is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-segment data SEG1 suggesting the correct operation order (LCR) is selected, and when the special bell LCR is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG2 suggests an incorrect operation order (LRC), SEG3 suggests an incorrect operation order (CLR), SEG4 suggests an incorrect operation order (CRL), SEG5 suggests an incorrect operation order (RLC), Any 7-segment data of SEG6 that suggests an incorrect answer operation order (RCL) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

When the special bell LRC is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-seg data SEG2 suggesting the correct operation order (LRC) is selected, and when the special bell LRC is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG1 suggests an incorrect operation order (LCR), SEG3 suggests an incorrect operation order (CLR), SEG4 suggests an incorrect operation order (CRL), SEG5 suggests an incorrect operation order (RLC), Any 7-segment data of SEG6 that suggests an incorrect answer operation order (RCL) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

When the special bell CLR is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-segment data SEG3 suggesting the correct operation order (CLR) is selected, and when the special bell CLR is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG1 suggests an incorrect operation order (LCR), SEG2 suggests an incorrect operation order (LRC), SEG4 suggests an incorrect operation order (CRL), SEG5 suggests an incorrect operation order (RLC), Any 7-segment data of SEG6 that suggests the incorrect answer operation order (RCL) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

When the special bell CRL is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-segment data SEG4 suggesting the correct operation order (CRL) is selected, and when the special bell CRL is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG1 suggesting an incorrect operation order (LCR), SEG2 suggesting an incorrect operation order (LRC), SEG3 suggesting an incorrect operation order (CLR), SEG5 suggesting an incorrect operation order (RLC), Any 7-segment data of SEG6 that suggests an incorrect answer operation order (RCL) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

When the special bell RLC is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-segment data SEG5 suggesting the correct operation order (RLC) is selected, and when the special bell RLC is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG1 suggests an incorrect operation order (LCR), SEG2 suggests an incorrect operation order (LRC), SEG3 suggests an incorrect operation order (CLR), SEG4 suggests an incorrect operation order (CRL), Any 7-segment data of SEG6 that suggests an incorrect answer operation order (RCL) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

When the special bell RCL is internally won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the 7-seg data SEG6 suggesting the correct operation order (RCL) is selected, and when the special bell RCL is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode. SEG1 suggests an incorrect operation order (LCR), SEG2 suggests an incorrect operation order (LRC), SEG3 suggests an incorrect operation order (CLR), SEG4 suggests an incorrect operation order (CRL), Any 7-segment data of SEG5 that suggests an incorrect answer operation order (RLC) is selected by a special bell distribution lottery (equal lottery with the same winning probability), which will be described later.

<Pushing order effect of main control unit / 7-segment data command>
The main control unit 300 refers to a command including a correct operation order according to the selected 7-segment data (hereinafter, a command including an operation order according to the selected 7-segment data is referred to as a 7-segment data command) as a first sub-control unit 400. I am trying to send to.

For example, when the common bell is internally won in the AT mode and the 7-segment data SEG2 is selected as the 7-segment data, a 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG2 selection is transmitted. Further, when the push order bell LCR is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode, a 7-segment data command indicating 7-segment data SEG1 selection is transmitted.

In addition, when the special bell RLC is internally won in the normal mode or the CZ mode, a 7-segment data command indicating 7-segment data SEG5 selection is transmitted, the special bell RLC is internally won in the AT mode or the special AT mode, and an equal lottery is performed. When 7-segment data SEG4 is selected as the 7-segment data, a 7-segment data command indicating 7-segment data SEG4 selection is transmitted.

<Producing the push order of the sub control unit>
Next, the push order effect of the sub-control unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “push order navigation”) will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (b). FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an outline of the push order effect of the sub-control unit when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG1 to 6 selection is received.

In the push order effect of the sub control unit of the present embodiment, the content of the push order effect is determined based on the 7-segment data command received from the main control unit 300. Here, the push order effect of the sub control unit includes an effect executed by the first sub control unit 400 that receives a command from the main control unit 300 and a second sub control unit that receives a command from the first sub control unit 400. Both of the effects executed by the 500 are included, and the sub-control unit includes the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. Needless to say, the push order effect according to the present embodiment may be executed by one control unit.

In this example, when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG1 selection is received, the effect 1-2 is selected regardless of the mode, and when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG2 selection is received, the effect 1-2 is selected. Effect 1-3 is selected regardless of the mode.

Here, the effect 1-2 suggests that the correct operation order is left → middle → right (LCR) by displaying the character “123” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In the production 1-3, the characters "132" are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to suggest that the correct operation order is left → right → middle (LRC). Is.

Further, when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG3 selection is received, the effect 2-2 is selected regardless of the mode, and when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG4 selection is received, the mode is set. Regardless, production 2-3 is selected.

Here, the effect 2-2 suggests that the correct operation order is the operation order of middle → left → right (CLR) by displaying the characters “213” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In the production 2-3, the characters "312" are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to suggest that the correct operation order is the operation order of middle → right → left (CRL). Is.

Further, when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG5 selection is received, the effect 3-2 is selected regardless of the mode, and when the 7-segment data command indicating the 7-segment data SEG6 selection is received, the mode is set. Regardless, production 3-3 is selected.

Here, the effect 3-2 suggests that the correct operation order is right-> left-> middle (RLC) by displaying the characters "231" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. 3-3 is an effect suggesting that the correct operation order is right-> middle-> left (RCL) by displaying the characters "321" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Is.

In the present embodiment, characters such as "123" are displayed to notify the instructions to the three reels 110 to 112, but the notification mode of the push order effect is not limited to this. That is, the notification mode of the push order effect is an example of a mode in which numbers and symbols are displayed, and the push order effect may be an effect that allows the player to perform a specific operation.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main processing of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300.

The basic control of the game is mainly performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main process of the main control unit shown in the figure unless a power failure or the like is detected.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of a medal. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of medals inserted is determined, a valid winning line is determined, and the random number generation circuit 316 generates the medals. Get a random number. Further, in step S102, preparations are made for transmitting a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S103, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this winning combination internal lottery process, preparations are made for the winning combination internal lottery, transmission of an internal lottery command indicating the result of the internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400, and the like. In step S104, the reel stop preparation process is performed. In this reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each reel 110-112 based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103.

In step S105, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation. In step S106, a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed. In this reel stop process, a process of determining whether or not all the reels have stopped is performed based on the reel rotation control process of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

In step S107, the winning determination of the symbol stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed. Here, it is determined that the winning combination has been won when the combination of symbols corresponding to the internally won winning combination or the winning combination whose flag is being carried over is aligned (stopped and displayed) on the activated winning line L1. .. Further, in step S107, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S108, the medal payout process is performed. In this medal payout process, if any winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

In step S109, the counter update process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this counter update process, various counters such as the MY counter and the compensation difference number counter are updated.

In step S110, the game state control process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this game state control process, processing for updating the RT state, mode, and the like, preparation for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400, and the like are performed. In step S111, the advantageous section end processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this advantageous section end processing, various corresponding processes are performed when the advantageous section ends.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Internal lottery process for prizewinners>
Next, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S103) in the main control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning combination internal lottery process.

In step S201, an internal lottery for the winning combination is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery, the winning combination internal lottery is performed using the random number value acquired in step S102 of the main control unit main process and the winning combination lottery table (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 306.

In step S202, the advantageous section transition process is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in the normal section in which the advantageous section flag is off, and when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied (in this example, any one of them). When the winning combination is internally won), processing such as setting the advantageous section flag to on is performed.

In step S203, the CZ transition lottery process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this CZ transition lottery process, processing related to the CZ transition lottery is performed based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step 201 and the like.

In step S204, the AT lottery process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this AT lottery process, processing related to the AT lottery such as the AT first hit lottery and the AT set addition lottery is performed based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step 201.

In step S205, the push order flag setting process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this push order flag setting process, the push order flag is set based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step 201 and the like. In step S206, the instruction monitor display process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this instruction monitor display process, processing related to the push order effect using the instruction monitor (payout number display 127) is performed based on the push order flag or the like set in step 205.

In step S207, after the internal lottery command transmission request processing is performed, the winning combination internal lottery processing is terminated. Although the details will be described later, in this internal lottery command transmission request processing, an internal lottery command indicating the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 based on the push order flag or the like set in step 205. Make preparations.

<CZ transition lottery process>
Next, the CZ transition lottery process (step S203) in the winning combination internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the CZ transition lottery process.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 1 (cherry), the small winning combination 2 (watermelon), or the small winning combination 3 (chance eye) is internally won, and if not, the CZ transition lottery process is performed. Is completed, and if applicable, the processing of step S302 and subsequent steps is performed.

In step S302, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, and if it is off, the CZ transition lottery process is ended, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the normal mode flag is on or off, and if it is off, the CZ transition lottery process is ended, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, a CZ transition lottery is performed using a random number value or the like, and in the next step S305, it is determined whether or not the CZ transition lottery has been won. As a result of the determination, in the case of non-winning, the CZ transition lottery process is terminated, and in the case of winning, the process proceeds to step S306, the CZ mode transition flag is set to ON, and then the CZ transition lottery process is terminated. When the CZ mode transition flag is set to ON in step S306, the specific condition A (acquisition of CZ right) is satisfied in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 7.

<AT lottery process>
Next, the AT lottery process (step S204) in the winning combination internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT lottery process.

In step S401, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 1 (cherry), the small winning combination 2 (watermelon), or the small winning combination 3 (chance eye) is internally won, and if not applicable, the AT lottery process is performed. When the process is completed and applicable, the processes of step S402 and subsequent steps are performed.

In step S402, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, and if it is off, the AT lottery process is ended, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S404, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is on or off, and if it is off, the AT lottery process is ended, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the AT first hit lottery described with reference to FIG. 10A is performed, and in the next step S406, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit lottery has been won. As a result of the determination, if the player is not elected, the AT lottery process is terminated, and if the result is won, the process proceeds to step S407, the AT mode transition flag is set to ON, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. When the AT mode transition flag is set to ON in step S407, the specific condition C (acquisition of AT right) is satisfied in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 7.

In step S408, the AT set addition lottery described with reference to FIG. 10B is performed, and in the next step S409, it is determined whether or not the AT set addition lottery has been won. As a result of the determination, if the player is not elected, the AT lottery process is terminated, and if the result is won, the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, the AT lottery process ends after adding 1 to the number of stocks of the AT set.

In this example, during the special AT mode (AT mode flag = off & CZ mode flag = off), benefits other than push order navigation (for example, AT addition, AT addition high accuracy zone, pseudo bonus, etc.) are not given to the player. Therefore, in the special AT mode (second advantageous game state), it is possible to compensate the game value (ball output) of beginners who are unfamiliar with the operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) and rescue the beginners. However, it is possible to prevent the gambling in the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state) from becoming excessively high.

<Push order flag setting process>
Next, the push order flag setting process (step S205) in the winning combination internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of the push order flag setting process.

In step S501, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S502 to perform the AT mode push order flag setting process (details will be described later), and then the push order flag setting process ends. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether the special AT mode flag (details will be described later) is on or off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S504 to perform the special AT mode push order flag setting process (details will be described later). The push order flag setting process is completed, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the push order flag setting process is terminated after performing the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process (details will be described later).

<AT mode push order flag setting process>
Next, the AT mode push order flag setting process (step S502) in the push order flag setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT mode push order flag setting process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the common bell (condition device 10) has been internally elected, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S602, the process proceeds to step S603 after the common bell pressing order distribution lottery is performed. In this common bell push order distribution lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 11, one 7-segment data is selected from 6 types of 7-segment data of SEG1 to SEG6 by an equal lottery. In step S603, after selecting the 7-segment data (SEG data) of the lottery result, the AT mode push order flag setting process ends.

In step S604, it is determined whether or not the special bell (condition devices 17 to 22) has been internally won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S605, the process proceeds to step S603 after the special bell push order sorting lottery is performed. In this special bell push order distribution lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 11, one 7-segment data (SEG data) of 5 types out of SEG1 to SEG6 is selected by equal lottery according to the type of special bell. Select seg data (SEG data).

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the push order bells (conditional devices 11 to 16) have been internally won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S607, and if not, the AT mode push order flag setting process ends. .. In step S607, as described with reference to FIG. 11, after selecting the 7-segment data (SEG data) corresponding to the internally elected condition device from the 6 types of 7-segment data (SEG data) of SEG1 to SEG6, the process proceeds to step S608. move on. In step S608, the AT mode push order flag setting process ends after the push order flag is set to on.

<Special AT mode push order flag setting process>
Next, the special AT mode push order flag setting process (step S504) in the push order flag setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special AT mode push order flag setting process.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the common bell (condition device 10) has been internally won, and if applicable, the special AT mode push order flag setting process is terminated, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S702. In step S702, it is determined whether or not the special bell (condition devices 17 to 22) has been internally elected, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S703, a push order execution lottery is performed. In this push order execution lottery, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the push order navigation with a winning probability of 1/2. If the result of the lottery is non-winning, the special AT mode push order flag setting process is terminated, and if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S705, the process proceeds to step S706 after the special bell push order sorting lottery is performed. In this special bell push order distribution lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 11, one 7-segment data (SEG data) of 5 types out of SEG1 to SEG6 is selected by equal lottery according to the type of special bell. Select seg data (SEG data). In step 706, after selecting the 7-segment data (SEG data) of the lottery result, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S707, it is determined whether or not the push order bells (conditional devices 11 to 16) have been internally won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S708, and if not, the special AT mode push order flag setting process ends. do. In the next step S708, a push order execution lottery is performed. In this push order execution lottery, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the push order navigation with a winning probability of 1/2. If the result of the lottery is non-winning, the special AT mode push order flag setting process is ended, and if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, as described with reference to FIG. 11, the 7-segment data (SEG data) corresponding to the internally elected condition device is selected from the 6 types of 7-segment data (SEG data) of SEG1 to SEG6, and then the step S711 is performed. move on. In step S711, the special AT mode push order flag setting process ends after the push order flag is set to on.

In the special AT mode push order flag setting process of this example, in order to make it difficult to guess the set value, in addition to not executing the push order navigation even if the common bell is internally won, the push order bell and If the special bell is internally won, there is a 1/2 chance that the push order navigation will be executed.

Conventionally, the first winning combination (common bell in this example) that can be won regardless of the stop operation condition and the second winning combination (book) that can be won only when the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition. In the example, in a game table equipped with a push order bell), when the player intentionally performs an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation), a predetermined payout (10 cards in this example) ), It can be understood that the first prize winner was internally elected, and if there is no prescribed payout, it can be understood that the second prize winner was internally elected. If the winning combination is a winning combination with a difference in the probability of internal winning according to the set value, the prescribed payout (10 in this example) cannot be obtained, but based on the type of winning combination. It was possible to guess the set value.

However, according to this example, the player intentionally notifies (navigation) by reducing the execution frequency of the push order bell navigation (first notification) and the common bell navigation (second notification). Even if the setting determination action is performed to determine (guess) the set value by performing an operation that does not comply with the stop operation conditions shown, the actual number of internal winnings of the push order bell and the common bell, and the number of internal winnings of each of the common bells, Since each number of times that can be grasped by the setting discrimination act will be different, it will be difficult to distinguish between the push order bell (first lottery result) and the common bell (second lottery result) only by the presence or absence of the predetermined payout. In addition to making it difficult to determine the set value based on the type of winning combination, there is a possibility that the opportunity to obtain a predetermined payout may be lost due to the setting determination act, so that act can be suppressed in advance. , The fairness of the player can be guaranteed.

In particular, the execution frequency of the push order bell navigation (first notification) is reduced to the first frequency (50%), and the execution frequency of the common bell navigation (second notification) is lower than the first frequency. Since the frequency is reduced to a low second frequency (0%), it is possible to prevent the reduction of the number of balls from being excessive while making it difficult to determine the set value.

<Normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process>
Next, the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process (step S505) in the push order flag setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process.

In step S801, it is determined whether or not the common bell (condition device 10) has been internally won, and if applicable, the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process is terminated, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S802. .. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the push order bells (conditional devices 11 to 16) have been internally won, and if applicable, the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process is terminated, and if not, the step Proceed to S803.

In step S803, it is determined whether or not the special bell (condition devices 17 to 22) has been internally won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S804, and if not applicable, the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process is performed. finish. In step S804, as described with reference to FIG. 11, after selecting the 7-segment data (SEG data) corresponding to the internally elected condition device from the 6 types of 7-segment data (SEG data) of SEG1 to SEG6, step S805 Proceed to. In step S805, after the push order flag is set to on, the normal mode / CZ mode push order flag setting process ends.

<Instruction monitor display processing>
Next, the instruction monitor display process (step S206) in the winning combination internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the instruction monitor display process.

In step S901, it is determined whether the push order flag stored for each internal winning combination is on or off. If it is off, the instruction monitor display process is terminated, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, the instruction monitor display process is terminated after the instruction monitor display control is performed.

In this instruction monitor display control, 7-segment data is selected based on the internal winning combination and stop data corresponding to the push order flag set to ON, and the selected 7-segment data is used on the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor). Set as lighting pattern data.

For example, when the push order flag corresponding to the common bell is set to ON and SEG1 is stored as 7-segment data, the 7-segment data SEG1 suggesting the operation order of the LCR is displayed on the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor). Set as lighting pattern data of. As a result, the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor) lights up in the display mode shown by SEG1 in FIG. 12 (a).

Further, when the push order flag corresponding to the push order bell is set to ON and SEG3 is stored as 7-segment data, the 7-segment data SEG3 suggesting the operation order of the LCR is displayed on the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor). ) Is set as lighting pattern data. As a result, the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor) lights up in the display mode shown by SEG3 in FIG. 12 (a).

Further, when the push order flag corresponding to the special bell is set to ON and SEG5 is stored as 7-segment data, the 7-segment data SEG5 suggesting the operation order of RLC is displayed on the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor). Set as lighting pattern data of. As a result, the payout number display 127 (instruction monitor) lights up in the display mode shown by SEG5 in FIG. 12 (a).

<Internal lottery command transmission request processing>
Next, the internal lottery command transmission request process (step S207) in the winning combination internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 22. Note that FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery command transmission request processing.

In step S1001, it is determined whether the push order flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1004 after making a transmission request for transmitting the internal lottery command including the push order information to the first sub-control unit 400.

Here, the internal lottery command includes internal winning information (information on the internal winning combination), AT-related information (lottery results of the AT first hit lottery and the AT set addition lottery, etc.), and when the push order flag is on. Further includes push order information (information indicating the push order).

In step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004 after making a transmission request for transmitting an internal lottery command that does not include push order information to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1004, the internal lottery command transmission request process is terminated after the push order flag is set to off.

<Counter update process>
Next, the counter update process (step S109) in the main process of the main control unit will be described with reference to FIG. 23. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of the counter update process.

In step S1101, the advantageous section counter update process is performed. In this advantageous section counter update process, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, and when it is on, 1 is added to the advantageous section counter.

In step S1102, the MY counter update process is performed. In this MY counter update process, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, and if it is on, the number of medals (granted to the player) acquired by the player in the game is used as the number of medals (paid out number). Subtract the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted medals), and when the value after subtraction is positive, add the value after subtraction to the counter value of the current MY counter (difference number counter). Then, the count value of the MY counter (difference number counter) is updated.

In step S1103, the compensation difference number counter update process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this compensation difference number counter update process, a process of updating the compensation difference number counter in the AT mode or the special AT mode is performed.

<Compensation difference number counter update process>
Next, the compensation difference number counter update process (step S1103) in the counter update process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of the compensation difference number counter update process.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether the special AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if it is off, the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated.

In step S1203, any of the condition devices 11 to 22 described with reference to FIG. 9A and the like, that is, the push order bell (condition device 11 to 16) or the special bell (condition device 17 to 22) is internally elected. It is determined whether or not, and if not applicable, the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, it is determined whether or not 10 cards are paid out (whether or not the navigation is not followed), and if applicable (when an operation that does not follow the navigation is performed), the process proceeds to step S1205, and if not applicable (navigation). If the operation is performed according to the above procedure), the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1205, after adding 9 to the compensation difference number of sheets, the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated.

Here, in this example, the number of payouts is 10 when one of the small winning combination 4 to the small winning combination 9 is won by performing the operation according to the navigation, and the small winning combination 7 to the small winning combination is performed by performing the operation not following the navigation. Since the number of cards to be paid out is one when any of the eight is won, 9 cards (= 10 cards-1 card) should be added as the number of lost cards of the player when the operation is not performed according to the navigation. It is configured in.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the special AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1207, and if it is off, the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated. In step S1207, 10 is subtracted from the compensation difference number counter, 0 is set when the value of the compensation difference number counter after subtraction is less than 0, and then the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated.

Here, in this example, 9 sheets (= 10 sheets-1 sheet) are added as the number of lost sheets of the player when the operation is not performed according to the navigation, but the actual number of sheets to be compensated is based on the number of lost sheets. In step S1207, 10 (= 3 input sheets + 9 lost sheets-2 sheets) is subtracted from the compensation difference number counter. The number of compensation sheets is not limited to this example, and may be the same as the number of lost sheets or may be even smaller than the number of lost sheets.

Further, in this example, in order to compensate for a beginner's push order mistake, the push order flag and the special bell medal were missed in the AT mode or the special AT mode, and the special bell was missed in the normal mode and the CZ mode. Even in some cases, the medals are not compensated. The present invention is not limited to this example, and may be targeted for omissions in the normal mode and the CZ mode.

In this example, even if an operation error of the stop operation means is made in the AT mode (first advantageous game state) and the game value cannot be obtained, at least a part of the game value that could not be obtained is special. Since it can be acquired in the AT mode (second advantageous game state), it is possible to compensate the game value (ball output) of beginners who are unfamiliar with the operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) and rescue the beginners. It is possible to prevent a decrease in playing motivation.

In particular, when at least a part of the game value is acquired in the special AT mode (second advantageous game state), not all of the game value that could not be acquired in the AT mode (first advantageous game state). Since the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state) is terminated, it is possible to prevent excessive relief in the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state), and it is possible to play games for beginners and the like. It can motivate you to improve.

<Game state control processing>
Next, the game state control process (step S110) in the main process of the main control unit will be described with reference to FIG. 25. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game state control process.

In step S1301, the RT state update process is performed. In this RT state update process, a process of updating the game state of the RT system is performed based on the RT transition diagram described with reference to FIG. In step S1302, the mode update process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this mode update process, a process of updating the game state of the AT system is performed based on the transition diagram of the AT mode described with reference to FIG. 7.

In step S1303, the AT state update process is performed. In this AT state update process, the number of AT games is updated. Specifically, when the number of AT remaining games is 0 and the number of AT sets remains, the number of AT sets is subtracted by one and the remaining AT games are played. A process of setting 30 as the initial value of the number is performed.

In step S1304, a transmission request for a game state command is made. The game state commands according to this example include the RT state based on the RT state update process in step S1301, the mode state based on the mode update process in step S1302, the number of AT sets based on the AT state update process in step S1303, the number of remaining AT games, and the like. It is a continuous command that includes the information of.

<Mode update process>
Next, the mode update process (step S1302) in the game state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the flow of the mode update process.

In step S1401, the CZ mode update process is performed. In this CZ mode update process, it is determined whether the CZ mode transition flag is on or off, and if it is on, the CZ mode transition flag is set to on and then the CZ mode transition flag is set to off. When the CZ mode flag is on, the number of remaining CZ games is updated, and when the condition for ending the CZ mode is satisfied (in this example, 32G is consumed after the transition to the CZ mode, and the number of remaining CZ games becomes 0. If), the CZ mode flag is set to off after the advantageous section end wait flag is set to on.

In step S1402, the AT mode update process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this AT mode update process, the mode update process is terminated after performing a process of shifting the AT mode to the special AT mode or the CZ mode.

In step S1403, the special AT mode update process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this special AT mode update process, a process of shifting the special AT mode to the CZ mode and the like are performed.

<AT mode update process>
Next, the AT mode update process (step S1402) in the mode update process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT mode update process.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the AT mode transition flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1502, the AT mode flag is set to on, the process proceeds to the next step S1503 to set the AT mode transition flag to off, and then the AT mode update process ends.

In step S1504, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1505, and if it is off, the AT mode update process is terminated. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the AT mode end condition is satisfied (in this example, whether or not the condition of no remaining game in AT mode & no stock of AT right is satisfied), and if it is satisfied, step S Proceed to S1506, and if it is not established, the AT mode update process is terminated.

In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation difference number counter is larger than 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1507, the special AT mode flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S1509, and if it is off. To step S1508, the CZ mode flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1509.

When the special AT mode flag is set to ON in step S1507, the specific condition E (no remaining game in AT mode & no AT right stock & compensation difference number) is set in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 7. Will meet. Further, when the CZ mode flag is set to ON in step S1508, the specific condition D (no remaining game in AT mode & no stock of AT right & no compensation difference number) is satisfied in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 7. It will be.

In step S1509, the AT mode update process ends after the AT mode flag is set to off.

<Special AT mode update process>
Next, the special AT mode update process (step S1403) in the mode update process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special AT mode update process.

In step S1601, it is determined whether the special AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if it is off, the special AT mode update process is terminated. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation difference number counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if it is not 0, the special AT mode update process is terminated.

In step S1603, the CZ mode flag is set to on, and in the next step S1604, the special AT mode flag is set to off, and then the special AT mode update process is terminated. When the CZ mode flag is set to ON in step S1603, the specific condition F (acquiring the compensation difference number during the special AT mode) is satisfied in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 7.

<Advantageous section end processing>
Next, the advantageous section end processing (step S111) in the main control unit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous section end processing.

In step S1701, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if it is off, the advantageous section end processing is terminated. In step S1702, it is determined whether the advantageous section end waiting flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1703 to set the advantageous section end waiting flag to off, and then proceeds to step S1705.

In step S1704, whether or not the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (in this example, whether or not 1500 G has been consumed in the advantageous section, or whether or not the value of the MY counter (difference number counter) has reached 2400). Is determined, and if it is established (when 1500 G is digested in the advantageous section, or when the value of the MY counter (difference number counter) reaches 2400), the process proceeds to step S1705, and if it is not established, it is advantageous. End the section end processing.

In step S1705, the advantageous section flag is set to off, and in the next step S1706, the advantageous section counter is cleared and the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the MY counter (difference number counter) is cleared, and in the next step S1708, AT-related information is cleared and the process proceeds to step S1709.

In step S1709, the normal mode flag is set to on, and in the next step S1710, the advantageous section ends after executing other advantageous section end processing such as turning off the advantageous section lamp and preparing to transmit a command indicating the end of the advantageous section. End the process.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S1801, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S1802, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S1803, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S1804, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S1805, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S1806, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1803, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state. In step S1807, the reel rotation control process is performed. In this reel rotation control process, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is controlled based on the rotation control data.

In step S1808, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission (transmission request) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data. In step S1809, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S1810, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S1812, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1811.

In step S1811, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1801 is set in each of the original registers. After that, it returns to the main processing of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S1812, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 31A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 31B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 31 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (a). When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S2001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state, respectively.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S2004, command processing is performed. In this command processing, processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is performed.

In step S2005, the effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, the effect is prepared (reserved) according to the effect reservation information in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S2005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S2007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S2005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S2005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S2008, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S2005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S2005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S2002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S2101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S2201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 31A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S2008, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Note that FIG. 32A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. .. Further, FIG. 3C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and FIG. 3D is a flowchart of an image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S2501 of the second sub-control unit main process, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S2501. In this initialization process, the input / output port initial setting, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S2504, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. In step S2505, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S2504, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 506, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S2506, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2505. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S2505, the image control corresponding to this command is performed, and the process returns to step S2502.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S2601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S2701, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S2502 in the second sub-control unit main process, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2502, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2702, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process in step S2506 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. In step S2801, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2803. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S2803, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S2801, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S2804, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504. In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2806. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered. In step S2806, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Number of medals won in AT mode and special AT mode>
Next, the number of medals won in the AT mode and the special AT mode will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the mode transition when the AT mode is not changed to the special AT mode, and FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram showing the mode transition when the AT mode is changed to the special AT mode. It is a figure which showed an example.

As described with reference to FIG. 16, in the AT lottery process of this example, when any of the small winning combination 1 (cherry), the small winning combination 2 (watermelon), or the small winning combination 3 (chance eye) is internally won, In the AT mode (advantageous section flag = on, AT mode flag = on), as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the AT set addition lottery is executed, so that the AT set can be added, but the special In the AT mode (advantageous section flag = on, AT mode flag & CZ mode flag = off), as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the AT set addition lottery is not executed. The present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured to execute an AT set addition lottery during the special AT mode.

FIG. 33 (c) shows the change in the number of medals won when the special AT mode shown in FIG. It is the figure which compared the change.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the game is advanced without shifting from the AT mode to the special AT mode, assuming that the net increase in the AT mode is 5.7, the net increase in medals is For example, it changes as shown in the graph G1 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game of shifting from the AT mode to the special AT mode is advanced, the net increase in the AT mode is 5.7 and the net increase in the special AT mode is 3.7. Assuming that the number of medals is the same, the net increase in the number of medals changes, for example, as shown in the graph G2 shown in FIG.

Since the graph G1 has a larger slope than the graph G2, the net increase per unit time is larger in the case where the AT mode is not changed to the special AT mode than in the case where the AT mode is changed to the special AT mode. It turns out to be advantageous for the player.

<Other termination conditions for special AT mode>
Next, other termination conditions of the special AT mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Note that FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining other termination conditions of the special AT mode.

As described with reference to FIG. 28, in the special AT mode update process, when the compensation difference number becomes 0 during the special AT mode (special AT mode flag = on), the special AT mode is terminated and the CZ The mode shifts, but the special AT mode also ends when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied.

As a specific example, as described with reference to FIG. 29, in the advantageous section end processing, it is advantageous when the value of the MY counter (difference number counter) reaches 2400 or when 1500 G is digested in the advantageous section. Although the section end processing is terminated, even in the special AT mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), when 1500 G is digested in the advantageous section and the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, or as shown in FIG. 34 (b). As described above, even when the value of the MY counter (difference number counter) reaches 2400 in the advantageous section and the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the special AT mode is terminated and the normal section (non-advantageous section) is entered.

<Display mode of the design display window (variable display unit)>
Next, the display mode of the symbol display window 113 (variable display unit) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Note that FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of display results when the small winning combination 4 to 9 are won.

<Display mode of design display window (variable display unit) / 4 small wins>
As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the small winning combination 4 (Fr1), the symbol combination of "replay symbol-replay symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the upper production line L2.

In this example, when the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the LCR, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) is stopped on the winning line L1. At the same time, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2.

In addition, when the push order bell LCR "small winning combination 4, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LCR in this example), the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2.

In addition, special bell LRC "small combination 4, 6-10", special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7-9, 11", special bell CRL "small combination 4-6, 8, 9, 11", special Internally win one of the bell RLC "small wins 4-7, 9, 11" and the special bell RCL "small wins 4-8, 11", and follow a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (LCR in this example). When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (Fr1) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper effect line L2.

<Display mode of design display window (variable display unit) / 5 small wins>
As shown in FIG. 35 (b), in the small winning combination 5 (Fr2), the symbol combination of "replay symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping production line L4.

In this example, when the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing the LRC, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) is stopped on the winning line L1. At the same time, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4.

In addition, when the push order bell LRC "small winning combination 5, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (LRC in this example), the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4.

In addition, special bell LCR "small combination 5-10", special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7-9, 11", special bell CRL "small combination 4-6, 8, 9, 11", special bell RLC Internally won one of "Small winning combination 4-7, 9, 11" or special bell RCL "Small winning combination 4-8, 11", and is determined in advance from a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order. When the stop operation is performed according to the incorrect answer operation order (LRC in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 5 (Fr2) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is on the right. The stop display is displayed on the descending effect line L4.

<Display mode of design display window (variable display unit) / 6 small wins>
As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning a prize.

When the common bell "small winning combination 4 to 9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the CLR, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

In addition, if the push order bell CLR "small winning combination 6, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CLR in this example), the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

In addition, special bell CRL "small role 4-6, 8, 9, 11", special bell RLC "small role 4-7, 9, 11", special bell RCL "small role 4-8, 11", special bell LCR Internally elected to either "small winning combination 5-10" or special bell LRC "small winning combination 4, 6-10", and out of a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order When the stop operation is performed according to (CLR in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 (Fr3) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1.

<Display mode of the design display window (variable display unit) Small winning combination 7 prizes>
As shown in FIG. 35 (d), in the small winning combination 7 (Fr4), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-bell symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping production line L5.

When the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the CRL, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. , The bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effect line L5.

If the push order bell CRL "small winning combination 7, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (CRL in this example), the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) is supported. The symbol combination to be used is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effect line L5.

In addition, special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7-9, 11", special bell RLC "small combination 4-7, 9, 11", special bell RCL "small combination 4-8, 11", special bell LCR Internally won either "Small combination 5-10" or special bell LRC "Small combination 4, 6-10", and among multiple incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order When the stop operation is performed according to (CRL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 7 (Fr4) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination rises to the right L5. Is stopped and displayed.

<Display mode of design display window (variable display unit) / 8 small wins>
As shown in FIG. 35 (e), in the small winning combination 8 (Fr5), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the lower production line L3.

When the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing RLC, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. , The bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower production line L3.

In addition, when the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 8, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RLC in this example), the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the lower effect line L3.

In addition, special bell RCL "small combination 4-8, 11", special bell LCR "small combination 5-10", special bell LRC "small combination 4, 6-10", special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5, 7" ~ 9,11 "and the special bell CRL" Small winning combination 4-6,8,9,11 ", and among multiple incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer When the stop operation is performed according to the operation order (RLC in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 8 (Fr5) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is the lower production line. Stop display is displayed on L3.

<Display mode of design display window (variable display unit) / 9 small wins>
As shown in FIG. 35 (f), in the small winning combination 9 (Fr6), the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 by winning, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is displayed. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the Koyama production line L6.

When the common bell "small winning combination 4-9" is internally won and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing RCL, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. , The bell-matched symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the Koyama production line L6.

In addition, when the push order bell RCL "small winning combination 9, 10, 11" is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (RCL in this example), the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the Koyama effect line L6.

In addition, special bell RLC "small combination 4-7, 9, 11", special bell LCR "small combination 5-10", special bell LRC "small combination 4, 6-10", special bell CLR "small combination 4, 5" , 7-9, 11 ", special bell CRL" small winning combination 4-6, 8, 9, 11 ", and among multiple incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation When the stop operation is performed according to the order (RCL in this example), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 9 (Fr6) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is the Koyama production line L6. Is stopped and displayed.

In this example, as described with reference to FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (f), various stop modes of the bell-aligned symbol combination derived (stop display) to the symbol display window 113 (variable display unit) are performed. A common bell in which the probability of internal winning is different according to multiple types of setting values, and a push order bell in which the probability of internal winning is the same in any of the multiple types of setting values. Since it becomes difficult to distinguish the set values, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the set values, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player.

Further, even in the specification using the winning line (effective line) and the effect line, it is possible to diversify the stopping mode of the bell-aligned symbol combination derived (stop display) to the symbol display window 113 (variable display unit). Above, the first lottery result (for example, push order bell LCR) and the third lottery result (common bell), and the second lottery result (for example, push order bell LRC) and the third lottery result (common). Since it becomes difficult to distinguish each of the bells), it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the set value, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player.

In addition, a special bell (fourth lottery result) in which the probability of internal winning is the same in any of the plurality of types of set values is further included, and the first in the game in which the special bell (fourth lottery result) is derived. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) or the second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC), the first display result (for example, the variable display unit) is displayed on the symbol display window 113 (variable display unit). Since the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is derived (stop display) on the winning line L1, the time required for determining the set value becomes longer, the operating rate of the game console is improved, and the operation rate of the game table is improved. It is possible to make it difficult to determine the set value, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player.

In addition, a special bell (fourth lottery result) different from any of the push order bell (first lottery result, second lottery result) and common bell (third lottery result) is further included, and the special bell (fourth lottery result) is further included. In the game from which the four lottery results are derived, a third stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC) that is different from any of the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) and the second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC) is derived. For example, when the operation is performed according to the push order CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), the symbol display window 113 (variable display unit) corresponds to the second display result (for example, the winning line L1 corresponds to a small winning combination of one payout number). Since the (stop display) of the symbol combination to be used is derived (stop display), the time required for determining the set value becomes longer, the operating rate of the game table is improved, and it is possible to make it difficult to determine the set value. The fairness of the person can be guaranteed.

The effect line in which the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed is not limited to this example. For example, in the common bell, the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a specific effect line (for example, the upper effect line L2). The push order bell may be configured so that the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a plurality of types of effect lines including at least a specific effect line (upper stage effect line L2). Further, in the common bell, the combination of bell-aligned symbols is stopped and displayed on a plurality of types of production lines (for example, the upper production line L2 and the lower production line L3), and in the push order bell, a plurality of types of production lines (upper production line L2) are displayed. The bell-aligned symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on a plurality of types of production lines including at least one production line in the lower production line L3).

<Push order production (push order navigation)>
Next, the push order effect (push order navigation) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of push order navigation in the AT mode.

In this example, when the mode is changed to AT mode, a display suggesting the number of remaining AT sets (in this example, an image including the character string "number of continuous sets 2") and a display suggesting the number of remaining AT games (in this example). In this example, an image including the character string "remaining 50G") and a display showing the value of the MY counter (difference number counter) (in this example, an image including the character string "total 340 sheets") are displayed. There is.

Further, in this AT mode, when the sub-control unit receives, for example, a 7-segment data command indicating 7-segment data SEG2 selection, the effect 1-3 shown in FIG. 12 (b) is selected, and FIG. 36 (a) shows. As shown in the above, by displaying the character "132" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an effect suggesting that the correct operation order is the operation order of left → right → middle (LRC) is executed.

FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of push order navigation in the special AT mode.

In this example, when the AT mode is changed to the special AT mode, the special AT mode display SP (in this example, the image including the character string "extending") suggesting that the special AT mode is in progress, and MY. A display indicating the value of the counter (difference number counter) (in this example, the character display of "total 480 sheets") is displayed.

Further, in this special AT mode, when the sub-control unit receives, for example, a 7-segment data command indicating 7-segment data SEG3 selection, the effect 2-2 shown in FIG. 12 (b) is selected, and FIG. 36 ( As shown in b), by displaying the characters "213" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an effect suggesting that the correct operation order is the operation order of middle → left → right (CLR) is executed. do.

The special AT mode display SP that suggests that the special AT mode is in progress is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a dedicated image used only in the special AT mode, or the end of the special AT mode. An image suggesting a mode to be shifted to later (for example, an image suggesting a CZ mode or an image suggesting a normal section (non-advantageous section)) may be used.

According to the game console according to the first embodiment, even if the game value cannot be obtained due to an operation error of the stop operation means in the AT mode (first advantageous game state), the game that cannot be obtained. Since at least a part of the value can be acquired in the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state) set after the end of the AT mode (first advantageous gaming state), the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) is obeyed. It is possible to compensate for the game value (ball output) of a beginner or the like who is unfamiliar with the operation, to rescue the beginner or the like, and to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play.

In addition, there is a concern about setting discrimination actions such as discriminating (guessing) the set value by intentionally performing an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) in the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state). However, according to the game console according to the first embodiment, the player intentionally reduces the execution frequency of the push order bell navigation (first notification) and the common bell navigation (second notification). Even if the setting determination action is performed, the number of internal winnings of each of the actual push order bell and the common bell will be different from the number of times each can be grasped by the setting determination action, and the predetermined payout ( Since it is difficult to distinguish between the push order bell (first lottery result) and the common bell (second lottery result) only by the presence or absence of (10 in this example), the set value is determined based on the type of winning combination. In addition to being difficult, there is a possibility of losing the opportunity to obtain a predetermined payout (10 in this example) due to the setting determination act, so that the act can be suppressed in advance, and the player's Fairness can be guaranteed.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Hereinafter, the game console (slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the configuration different from the slot machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described below.

<Types of AT and bonus game states (modes)>
First, with reference to FIG. 37, the types and transitions of the AT system and bonus system gaming states (modes) in the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a transition diagram of the game states of the AT system and the bonus system in the slot machine according to the second embodiment, and is a modified example of the transition diagram of the game states of the AT system and the bonus system described with reference to FIG. 7.

In the slot machine according to the first embodiment, an example in which the special AT mode is not changed to the AT mode is shown, but in the present embodiment, the special AT mode can be changed (returned) to the AT mode.

As a specific example, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined specific condition E is satisfied (in this example, the condition where the number of navigation failures is 3 or more is satisfied), the mode shifts to the special AT mode. Further, in this example, since no AT mode remaining games and no AT rights stock are set as conditions for transition to the special AT mode, the number of AT remaining games and the stock of AT rights in the AT mode are inherited in the special AT mode. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, in the special AT mode, when the predetermined specific condition F is satisfied (in this example, when the condition of no AT remaining game & no AT right stock is satisfied during the special AT mode), the CZ mode is set. It is configured to shift to the AT mode when the transition is performed and the predetermined specific condition I is satisfied (in this example, the return condition is satisfied).

Here, the return condition refers to a condition for shifting (returning) from the special AT mode to the AT mode. In this example, when the push order mismatch counter that counts the number of navigation failures in the AT mode is smaller than 1, That is, in the special AT mode, it is a condition that is satisfied when the navigation is successful the same number of times as the number of failures in the AT mode (details will be described later).

The return condition is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of successful navigations is less than the number of failures in the AT mode in the special AT mode, or the special AT mode. It may be a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of games have been played in <Compensation difference number counter update process>
Next, the compensation difference number counter update process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Note that FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the flow of the compensation difference number counter update process according to the second embodiment, and is a modification of the compensation difference number counter update process described with reference to FIG. 24.

In the slot machine according to the first embodiment, if the push order bell or the special bell is internally won in the AT mode and 10 sheets are not paid out, the compensation difference number is added, and the push order bell or the special bell is added in the special AT mode. An example is shown in which the compensation difference number is subtracted when the bell is internally elected and 10 cards are paid out.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the push order bell or the special bell is internally won in the AT mode, if the push order does not match the push order navigation, 1 is added to the push order mismatch counter. When the push order bell or the special bell is internally won in the special AT mode, 1 is subtracted from the push order mismatch counter when the push order matches the push order navigation.

Specifically, in the compensation difference number counter update process according to the second embodiment, instead of the processing of steps S1204, S1205, and S1207 of the compensation difference number counter update process described with reference to FIG. The process is being applied.

In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the pressing order matches the 7-segment data (SEG data), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1211. If not, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1211, after adding 1 to the push order mismatch counter, the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1206 that the special AT mode flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1212, 1 is subtracted from the push order mismatch counter, and then the compensation difference number counter update process is terminated.

<AT mode update process>
Next, the AT mode update process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Note that FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT mode update process according to the second embodiment, and is a modification of the AT mode update process described with reference to FIG. 27.

The slot machine according to the first embodiment shifts to the special AT mode when the AT mode end condition is satisfied in the AT mode (no remaining games in the AT mode & no stock of AT rights) and there is a compensation difference number. An example is shown.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode end condition is not satisfied in the AT mode, but the push order mismatch counter is larger than 2, (when the condition of 3 or more navigation failures is satisfied), It is configured to shift to the special AT mode.

Specifically, in the AT mode update process according to the second embodiment, the process of steps S151 to S1512 is applied instead of the AT mode update process step S1506 described with reference to FIG. 27.

In step S1510, it is determined whether the special AT mode standby flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1511, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1503 after setting the special AT mode transition flag to ON.

In step S1512 to be executed when the AT mode end condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order mismatch counter is larger than 2 (whether or not the number of navigation failures is 3 or more), and if applicable. (When the number of navigation failures is 3 or more), the process proceeds to step S1507, and if not applicable, the AT mode update process is terminated.

When the special AT mode flag is set to ON in step S1507 of the AT mode update process shown in FIG. 39, the specific condition E (navigation failure count of 3 times or more) is satisfied in the mode transition described with reference to FIG. 37. It will be.

In this example, when the operation that does not follow the notification (navigation) is performed a plurality of times (three times or more in this example), the condition of the specific condition E shown in FIG. 37 is satisfied, and the mode shifts to the special AT mode. The operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) is not intentional, and it is possible to simply relieve the player or the like who made an operation error.

<Special AT mode update process>
Next, the special AT mode update process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Note that FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special AT mode update process according to the second embodiment, and is a modification of the special AT mode update process described with reference to FIG. 28.

In the slot machine according to the first embodiment, an example of shifting to the CZ mode when the compensation difference number becomes 0 in the special AT mode is shown.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the AT mode end condition is not satisfied in the special AT mode, but when the return condition is satisfied (in this example, the push order mismatch counter is less than 1), the AT mode is used. When the AT mode end condition is satisfied in the special AT mode (when the condition of no remaining game in AT mode & no stock of AT right is satisfied), the mode is configured to shift to CZ mode.

Specifically, in the special AT mode update process according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S161 to S1617 are applied in addition to the process of the special AT mode update process described with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S1611, the special AT mode flag is set to on, and in the next step S1612, the special AT mode transition flag is set to off, and then the special AT mode update process ends.

In step S1613, it is determined whether the special AT mode flag is on or off, and if it is off, the special AT mode update process is terminated, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1614. In step S1614, it is determined whether or not the special AT mode end condition is satisfied, and if the special AT mode end condition is satisfied, various processes for proceeding to step S1603 and shifting to the CZ mode are performed, otherwise. If so, the process proceeds to step S1615.

In step S1615, it is determined whether or not the push order mismatch counter is smaller than 1, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1616 to set the AT mode flag to ON, and then proceeds to step S1617. The AT mode update process is terminated. In step S1617, the special AT mode update process ends after the special AT mode flag is set to off.

In this example, when the return condition is satisfied (in this example, when the push order mismatch counter is less than 1), the AT mode is entered, so that the push order bell navigation (first notification) and the common bell navigation By giving the player an opportunity to return the execution frequency of (second notification) to the original (return to 100% in this example), it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

In particular, when an operation is performed according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation), the AT mode is restored, so that the operation according to the notification (navigation) can be prompted, and the first notification is performed in a natural flow. And the execution frequency of the second notification can be restored.

<Number of medals won in AT mode and special AT mode>
Next, the number of medals acquired in the AT mode and the special AT mode according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition when the AT mode is not shifted to the special AT mode, and is the same diagram as in FIG. 33 (a). On the other hand, FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition in the case of shifting (returning) to the AT mode after shifting from the AT mode to the special AT mode.

As described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined specific condition E is satisfied (when the condition of the number of navigation failures of 3 times or more is satisfied), the special AT mode is set. At the same time as the transition, in the special AT mode, the number of remaining AT games and the stock of AT rights in the AT mode are taken over. Further, in the special AT mode, when the predetermined specific condition I is satisfied (when the return condition is satisfied), the mode is configured to shift to the AT mode.

At the timing indicated by the reference numeral T1 in FIG. 41 (b), since the specific condition E was satisfied in the AT mode (the condition that the number of navigation failures was 3 or more was satisfied), the mode was changed to the special AT mode, and the latest AT mode was used. Based on the number of AT remaining games (for example, the remaining 5G) and the stock of AT rights (for example, the remaining 2 sets), the special AT mode for the number of AT remaining games (for example, the remaining 5G) is executed.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T2, the special AT mode is continued based on the stock of AT rights inherited from the AT mode (for example, the remaining two sets) at the time of transition to the special AT mode.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T3, in the special AT mode, since the predetermined specific condition I was satisfied (the return condition was satisfied), the mode was changed to the AT mode (return), and then the latest special AT mode was satisfied. Based on the number of AT remaining games inherited from (for example, the remaining 10G) and the stock of AT rights (for example, the remaining 1 set), the AT mode for the number of AT remaining games (for example, the remaining 10G) is executed.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T4, one AT right stock is exhausted and the AT mode is continued based on the AT right stock inherited from the latest special AT mode (for example, the remaining one set). ..

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T5, the specific condition E was satisfied in the AT mode (the condition that the number of navigation failures was 3 or more was satisfied). Based on the number of AT remaining games (for example, the remaining 10G) and the stock of AT rights (for example, the remaining 0 sets), the special AT mode for the number of AT remaining games (for example, the remaining 10G) is executed.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T6, since the predetermined specific condition F was satisfied in the special AT mode (the condition that there was no remaining AT game and no stock of AT rights was satisfied during the special AT mode), the mode was changed to the CZ mode. It is migrating.

FIG. 41 (c) shows the change in the number of medals won when the special AT mode shown in FIG. It is the figure which compared the change.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the game is advanced without shifting from the AT mode to the special AT mode, the net increase in the number of medals is assumed to be 5.7 in the AT mode. For example, it changes as shown in the graph G3 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the AT mode is changed to the special AT mode or the special AT mode is changed (returned) to the AT mode, the net increase in the number of sheets in the AT mode is 5.7. Assuming that the net increase in the number of medals and the special AT mode is 3.7, the net increase in the number of medals changes, for example, as shown in the graph G4 shown in FIG.

Since the graph G3 has a larger slope than the graph G4, the net increase per unit time is larger when the AT mode is not changed to the special AT mode than when the AT mode is changed to the special AT mode. It turns out to be advantageous for the player.

Further, in the AT mode (first advantageous gaming state), there is a concern about a setting discriminating act such as discriminating (guessing) a set value by intentionally performing an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation). According to the game console according to the second embodiment, when the setting determination action occurs in the AT mode, the push order bell navigation (first notification) and the common bell navigation (second notification) are executed. By shifting to the special AT mode (second advantageous gaming state) that reduces the frequency, in addition to making it difficult to determine the set value based on the type of winning combination, the player can use the special AT mode. Since the AT right is consumed, the net increase in the number of sheets per unit time can be reduced, the setting determination action can be more reliably suppressed, and the fairness of the player can be ensured.

In addition, during the special AT mode, benefits other than push order navigation (for example, AT addition, AT addition high accuracy zone, pseudo bonus, etc.) are not given to the player, so no privilege is given to the setting determination act. Penalty can be given, and the act can be effectively further suppressed.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. (Reel 110 to 112) shown, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means capable of a stop operation (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a stop control means for performing stop control of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means (for example). For example, a game value giving means (for example, FIG. 13) capable of giving a game value (for example, a medal, a re-game) based on the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13 and the display result derived to the variable display unit. The medal payout process of step S108 shown in step 13, the advantageous game granting means (for example, the AT lottery process shown in FIG. 16) capable of granting an advantageous game (for example, AT set) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and When the advantageous game is given, the game state setting means (for example, the game state control process shown in FIG. 25) capable of setting the advantageous game state (for example, AT state) over a plurality of games, and the advantageous game. A game table including a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor display process shown in FIG. 21 and a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of notifying information indicating a stop operation condition of the stop operation means in a state. In the game in which the first lottery result (for example, the push order bells of the condition devices 11 to 16 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) is derived, the stop control means is the first stop operation means. When the operation is performed according to one stop operation condition (for example, the correct operation order), the first display result (for example, (1) the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the variable display unit. , (2) Stop display of symbol combinations corresponding to normal replay, (3) Stop display of bell-aligned symbol combinations on the first line of the variable display unit (regardless of whether or not the game medium is paid out), etc. Then, in the game in which the first lottery result is derived, when the stop operation means is operated according to a stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition (for example, an incorrect answer operation order), the variable display A second display result different from the first display result (for example, (1) stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of one payout number, (2) symbol combination corresponding to the special replay) Is a means for deriving a stop display, (3) a bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped on the second line of the variable display unit (regardless of whether or not the game medium is paid out), etc.), and the notification means is said. When the first lottery result is derived in the advantageous gaming state, the notification indicating the first stop operation condition is notified in a predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A, FIG. 12). (B), the means that can be notified by the push order effect shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), and the game value-adding means is the variable display in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. When the unit has the first display result (for example, the number of payouts is 10), the game value is higher than when the unit has the second display result (for example, the number of payouts is 1). It is a means for giving, and the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT mode shown in FIG. 7) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, different from the first advantageous gaming state). , The special AT mode shown in FIG. 7), and the game state setting means is at least a part of the case where an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification is performed in the first advantageous game state. When the second advantageous game state setting condition that is satisfied in (for example) is satisfied (for example, an operation that does not follow the notification (navigation) is performed, and the condition that "there is a compensation difference number" included in the specific condition E shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied. This is a means that can set the second advantageous gaming state, and the game that could not be acquired in the first advantageous gaming state due to an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification. It is a game table characterized in that at least a part of the value is configured to be acquired in the second advantageous gaming state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if an operation error of the stop operation means is made in the first advantageous game state and the game value cannot be obtained, at least a part of the game value that could not be obtained. Can be obtained in the second advantageous game state, so that the game value (ball output) of beginners who are unfamiliar with the operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) can be compensated and the beginners can be rescued. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

In addition, the first advantageous gaming state is a privilege granting process (for example, AT addition, AT addition high accuracy zone, pseudo bonus, etc.) for granting a privilege advantageous to the player regarding the advantageous gaming state. The AT set addition lottery in step S408 shown in FIG. 16) can be executed, and the second advantageous gaming state may be a gaming state in which the privilege granting process is not executed.

With such a configuration, in the second advantageous game state, it is possible to compensate the game value (ball output) of a beginner or the like who is unfamiliar with the operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) and rescue the beginner or the like. Although possible, it is possible to prevent the gambling in the second advantageous gaming state from becoming excessively high.

Further, the notification means derives the first lottery result (for example, the push order bells of the condition devices 11 to 16 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) in the first advantageous gaming state. It may be a means for lowering the execution frequency of the notification when the first lottery result is derived in the second advantageous gaming state than the execution frequency of the notification in the case of.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation for improving the game to beginners and the like.

Further, the game state setting means can set the second advantageous game state after the duration of the first advantageous game state ends when the second advantageous game state setting condition is satisfied. It may be.

With such a configuration, since the first advantageous gaming state does not end in the middle, the operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) is performed while giving a sharpness to the gaming period of the advantageous gaming state. There is no disadvantage to the player.

When the second advantageous game state setting condition is satisfied, the game state setting means interrupts the first advantageous game state and sets the second advantageous game state, and then the second advantageous game state. It may be a means capable of resuming the interrupted first advantageous gaming state when the advantageous gaming state of the above is terminated.

Further, when the game state setting means acquires at least a part of the game value that could not be acquired in the first advantageous game state in the second advantageous game state from which the first lottery result is derived. In addition, it may be a means capable of ending the setting of the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the relief in the second advantageous gaming state from becoming excessive, and it is possible to motivate beginners and the like to improve the game.

Further, the lottery is provided with a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B) having different degrees of advantage to the player. The means is a means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination based on the set value and deriving the lottery result, and is shown in the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 9A). The push order bells of the condition devices 11 to 16) are lottery results in which the probability of internal winning is the same (for example, 5000/65536) in any of the plurality of set values, and the lottery results include the plurality. A second lottery result (for example, a common bell of the condition device 10 shown in FIG. 9A) in which a difference in the probability of internal winning is provided according to a set value of the type is included, and the stop control means is described above. When the stop operation means is operated in the game from which the second lottery result is derived, the first display result (for example, the number of payouts 10) is displayed on the variable display unit regardless of the stop operation conditions of the stop operation means. It is a means for deriving a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination of sheets), and the notification means is the first stop operation condition when the second lottery result is derived in the advantageous gaming state. Is a means capable of notifying the notification indicating the above in the predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A and the push order effect shown in FIG. 12B). The notification when the first lottery result is derived in the second advantageous gaming state rather than the execution frequency of the notification when the first lottery result is derived in the first advantageous gaming state. (For example, from 100% to 50%), and the execution frequency of the notification is higher than the execution frequency of the notification when the second lottery result is derived in the first advantageous gaming state. It may be a means for reducing (for example, reducing from 100% to 0%) the execution frequency of the notification when the second lottery result is derived in the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first lottery result and the second lottery result by reducing the execution frequency of the notification indicating the first stop operation condition. Therefore, the notification (navigation) is intentionally performed. It is possible to perform an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by, make it difficult to determine the set value, and ensure the fairness of the player.

<Invention 2 of the present application>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, reels 110 to 10 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 112) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B), and a setting. Based on the set value, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of a stop operation, and a stop control means for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means. (For example, the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13) and the game value-imparting means (for example, replay) capable of imparting a game value (for example, a medal, a re-game) based on the display result derived to the variable display unit. The medal payout process of step S108 shown in FIG. 13 and the notification means capable of notifying information indicating the stop operation condition of the stop operation means (for example, the instruction monitor display process shown in FIG. 21 and the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). ), And the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, 5000/65536) in which the probability of internal winning is the same for any of the plurality of types of set values. , The push order bells of the condition devices 11 to 16 shown in FIG. 9A) and the second lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values (for example, FIG. 9 (for example, FIG. 9). The stop control means includes the condition device 10 (common bell) shown in a), and the stop operation means is the first stop operation condition (for example, correct answer) in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. When the operation is performed according to the operation order), the first display result (for example, (1) the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed, and (2) the normal replay is supported. The symbol combination is stopped and displayed, (3) the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the first line of the variable display unit (regardless of whether or not the game medium is paid out), etc.), and the first lottery result is When the stop operation means is operated according to a second stop operation condition (for example, an incorrect answer operation order) different from the first stop operation condition in the derived game, the first stop operation unit is displayed on the variable display unit. Second table different from the displayed result Display results (for example, (1) stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of one payout, (2) stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special replay, (3) on the second line of the variable display unit. When the stop operation means is operated in the game in which the bell-aligned symbol combination is derived to stop the display (whether or not the game medium is paid out), etc., and the second lottery result is derived, the stop is performed. Stopping of the operating means The first display result is derived to the variable display unit regardless of the operating conditions, and the notification means is the first stop when the first lottery result is derived. The first notification indicating the operating condition is transmitted in a predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A, the push order effect shown in FIGS. 12B, 36A, and 36B). When the second lottery result is derived, the second notification indicating the first stop operation condition can be notified in the predetermined notification mode, and the notification means. Is an operation that does not follow the notification (navigation) when the notification execution frequency reduction condition that is satisfied at least in a part of the case where the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not satisfied (for example, the operation that does not follow the notification (navigation)) is performed. When the specific condition E shown in 7 is satisfied and the special AT mode is entered), the execution frequency of the first notification is reduced (for example, reduced from 100% to 50%), and the second notification is reduced. It is a game table characterized by being a means for reducing the execution frequency of (for example, reducing from 100% to 0%).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, by reducing the execution frequency of the first notification and the second notification, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, so that it is intentionally made. It is possible to perform an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation), make it difficult to determine the set value, and ensure the fairness of the player.

In addition, the notification means reduces the execution frequency of the first notification to the first frequency (for example, reducing it to 50%) when the condition for reducing the frequency of notification execution is satisfied, and the second notification means. It may be a means for reducing the execution frequency of the notification to a second frequency (for example, reducing to 0%) lower than the first frequency.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an excessive decrease in the number of balls to be ejected while making it difficult to determine the set value.

Further, the second frequency may be zero.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and it is possible to make it even more difficult to determine the set value.

Further, the notification execution frequency reduction condition is shown in FIG. 37 when the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not performed a plurality of times (for example, the operation not following the notification (navigation) is performed three times or more). It may be a condition that is satisfied when the condition of the specific condition E is satisfied and the mode is changed to the special AT mode).

With such a configuration, the operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) is not intentional, and it is possible to relieve the player or the like who simply made an operation error.

Further, the notification means is operated according to the notification (navigation) when a predetermined return condition is satisfied in the game after the game in which the notification execution frequency reduction condition is satisfied, and is shown in FIG. 37. When the condition of the specific condition I is satisfied and the mode shifts (returns) to the AT mode, or when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in the game after the game (for example, the special AT mode) in which the condition for reducing the frequency of notification execution is satisfied. In a game after a game in which the notification execution frequency reduction condition is satisfied (for example, when the AT set of the game is digested in a special AT mode), the execution frequency of each of the first notification and the second notification is set. It may be a means that can be undone.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play by giving the player an opportunity to return the execution frequency of the first notification and the second notification to the original.

Further, the predetermined return condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in a part of the game after the game in which the notification execution frequency reduction condition is satisfied when the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is performed. You may.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt an operation according to the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation), and it is possible to restore the execution frequency of the first notification and the second notification in a natural flow. ..

Further, when the first display result is derived, the game value adding means adds a predetermined amount of the game value (for example, 10 sheets), and when the second display result is derived. , The means that does not give the predetermined amount of game value may be used.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, reels 110 to 10 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 112) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B) and a setting. Based on the set value, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of a stop operation, and a stop control means for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means. (For example, the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13) and the game value giving means (for example, replay) capable of giving a game value (for example, a medal, a re-game) based on the display result derived to the variable display unit. The medal payout process in step S108 shown in FIG. 13) and the notification means capable of notifying information indicating the operation conditions of the stop operation means (for example, the instruction monitor display process shown in FIG. 21 and the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). The first lottery result (for example, 5000/65536) in which the probability of internal winning is the same (for example, 5000/65536) in any of the plurality of types of set values described in the lottery result. , The push order bell LCR of the condition device 11 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a) and the second lottery result (for example, the push of the condition device 12 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a)). The forward bell LRC) and the third lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values (for example, the condition device 10 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A). The stop control means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, correct answer push order LCR) in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. In this case, the first display result is displayed on the variable display unit (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper production line L2). Is derived, and in the game from which the first lottery result is derived, the stop operation means is operated according to a stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition (for example, an incorrect answer push order other than the correct answer push order LCR). In that case, the variable display unit is displayed. The three display results (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 or the small winning combination 11 with one payout number is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1) are derived, and the stop is performed in the game in which the second lottery result is derived. When the operating means is operated according to a second stop operating condition different from the first stop operating condition (for example, correct answer pressing order LRC), the second display result (for example, winning line L1) is displayed on the variable display unit. The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed, and the bell-aligned symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping effect line L4), and the stop is performed in the game in which the second lottery result is derived. When the operating means is operated according to a stop operation condition different from the second stop operation condition (for example, an incorrect answer pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order LRC), a fourth display result (for example, for example) is displayed on the variable display unit. In the game in which the small winning combination 10 or the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 with one payout number is derivated to the winning line L1 and the third lottery result is derived, the stop operating means is the first. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition, the first display result is derived to the variable display unit, and in the game from which the third lottery result is derived, the stop operation means follows the second stop operation condition. It is a means for deriving the second display result to the variable display unit when operated, and in the first display result, a specific symbol combination (for example, a bell-aligned symbol combination) is the variable display unit. It is a display result that stops at the first line (for example, the upper effect line L2), and the second display result is a second display in which the specific symbol combination is different from the first line of the variable display unit. It is a display result that stops at a line (for example, a downward-sloping effect line L4), and in the third display result and the fourth display result, the specific symbol combination stops at any line of the variable display unit. The notification means does not display, and when the first lottery result is derived, the notification means provides the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition in a predetermined notification mode (for example, FIG. 12A). When the second lottery result is derived, the second lottery result can be notified by the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. When the second notification indicating the second stop operation condition can be notified in the predetermined notification mode and the result of the third lottery is derived, either the first notification or the second notification It is a means capable of notifying the third notification in the predetermined notification mode, and is a means before. The notifying means performs an operation that does not follow the notification (navigation) when the notification execution frequency reduction condition that is satisfied at least in a part of the case where the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not satisfied (for example, the operation that does not follow the notification (navigation)) is satisfied. When the specific condition E shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied and the mode shifts to the special AT mode), the execution frequency of each of the first notification and the second notification is reduced, and the third notification is performed. It may be a game table characterized in that it is a means for reducing the execution frequency.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, by reducing the execution frequency of each of the first, second, and third notifications, the first lottery result, the third lottery result, and the second lottery Since it becomes difficult to distinguish between the result and the third lottery result, it is possible to intentionally perform an operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation), making it difficult to determine the set value, and the player's fairness. Sex can be guaranteed.

Further, when the condition for reducing the frequency of executing the notification is satisfied, the notification means reduces the execution frequency of each of the first notification and the second notification to the first frequency, and also reduces the execution frequency of the third notification to the first frequency. It may be a means for reducing the execution frequency of the above to a second frequency lower than the first frequency.

Further, the second frequency may be zero.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and it is possible to make it even more difficult to determine the set value.

Further, the notification execution frequency reduction condition is shown in FIG. 37 when the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not performed a plurality of times (for example, the operation not following the notification (navigation) is performed three times or more). It may be a condition that is satisfied when the condition of the specific condition E is satisfied and the mode is changed to the special AT mode).

With such a configuration, the operation that does not comply with the stop operation condition indicated by the notification (navigation) is not intentional, and it is possible to relieve the player or the like who simply made an operation error.

<Invention 3 of the present application>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, reels 110 to 10 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 112) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B) and a setting. Based on the set value, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of a stop operation, and a stop control means for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means. (For example, the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13) and the game value giving means (for example, a game value giving means) capable of giving a game value (for example, a medal, a re-game) based on the display result derived to the variable display unit. A game table including the medal payout process of step S108 shown in FIG. 13), and the lottery result has the same probability of internal winning in any of the plurality of types of set values (for example, 5000/65536). The probability of internal winning is the same for any of the first lottery results (for example, the push order bell LCR of the condition device 11 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) and the plurality of types of set values. (For example, according to the second lottery result (for example, the push order bell LRC of the condition device 12 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) and the plurality of types of set values. The third lottery result (for example, the common bell of the condition device 10 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) with a difference in the probability of internal winning is included, and the stop control means , When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, correct answer pressing order LCR) in the game from which the first lottery result is derived, the first line of the variable display unit (for example, , The stop operation means is different from the first stop operation condition in the game in which a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell-aligned symbol combination) is derived to the upper production line L2) and the first lottery result is derived. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition (for example, the incorrect answer pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order LCR), the predetermined symbol combination is not derived to any line of the variable display unit, and the second lottery result is obtained. In the game from which When the stop operation means is operated according to a second stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition (for example, correct answer pressing order LRC), the second line different from the first line of the variable display unit. In a game in which the predetermined symbol combination is derived to the line (for example, the downward-sloping effect line L4) and the second lottery result is derived, the stop operation means is different from the second stop operation condition. When the operation is performed according to the conditions (for example, the incorrect answer pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order LRC), the predetermined symbol combination is not derived to any line of the variable display unit, and the third lottery result is derived. When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition in the game, the predetermined symbol combination is derived to the first line of the variable display unit, and the third lottery result is obtained. It is a means for deriving the predetermined symbol combination to the second line of the variable display unit when the stop operation means is operated according to the second stop operation condition in the derived game. It is a game table.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make various combinations of symbols derived (stopped display) on the variable display unit, and also the first lottery result, the third lottery result, and the second lottery result. Since it becomes difficult to distinguish between the lottery result and the third lottery result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the set value, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player.

Further, the notification means (for example, the instruction monitor display process shown in FIG. 21 and the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of transmitting information indicating the operation conditions of the stop operation means is provided, and the notification means is the first. When the lottery result is derived, the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition is transmitted to a predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A, FIG. 12B). , The push order effect shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b)), and when the second lottery result is derived, the second notification indicating the second stop operation condition is given. When the third lottery result is derived, either the first notification or the second notification can be notified by the means capable of notifying in the predetermined notification mode. There may be.

With such a configuration, information indicating the operating conditions of the stop operating means can be notified, which is suitable for a game table that executes notification (navigation).

Further, in the variable display unit, an effective line used for winning (for example, the winning line L1 shown in FIG. 2) and an effect line used for the effect (for example, the effect lines L1 to L6 shown in FIG. 2) are set. The production line includes a first production line (for example, the upper production line L2) and a second production line different from the first production line (for example, a downward-sloping production line L4). The stop control means is included in the effective line of the variable display unit when the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. One effective symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination "replay symbol-replay symbol-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 with 10 payouts) is derived, and the predetermined symbol combination is derived to the first production line. Then, when the stop operation means is operated according to a stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition in the game from which the first lottery result is derived, the first effective line of the variable display unit is displayed. In a game in which one effective symbol combination is not derived and the predetermined symbol combination is not derived to any of the effect lines and the second lottery result is derived, the stop operation means is the second stop operation condition. When operated according to the above, the effective line of the variable display unit has a second effective symbol combination different from the first effective symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination “replay” corresponding to the small winning combination 5 with 10 payouts. In the game in which the symbol-bell symbol-replay symbol ") is derived and the predetermined symbol combination is derived to the second effect line, and the second lottery result is derived, the stop operation means is the second. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition different from the stop operation condition, the second effective symbol combination is not derived to the effective line of the variable display unit, and the predetermined symbol combination is guided to any of the effect lines. When the stop operation means is operated in accordance with the first stop operation condition in the game in which the third lottery result is derived, the first effective symbol combination is combined with the effective line of the variable display unit. When the stop operation means is operated according to the second stop operation condition in the game in which the predetermined symbol combination is derived to the first effect line and the third lottery result is derived. , The second effective symbol combination is derived to the effective line of the variable display unit, and before the second effect line. It may be a means for deriving a predetermined symbol combination.

With such a configuration, even if the specifications use the effective line and the effect line, the combination of symbols derived (stop display) on the variable display unit can be diversified, and the first lottery result can be obtained. Since it becomes difficult to distinguish the third lottery result and the second lottery result from the third lottery result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the set value, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player. ..

Further, the game value-adding means may be a means for adding a predetermined amount of the game value (for example, 10 sheets) when the predetermined symbol combination is derived, and the game value-adding means may be used. , When the predetermined symbol combination is derived, it may be a means for giving a re-game as the game value.

<Invention 4 of the present application>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, reels 110 to 10 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 112) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B), and a setting. Based on the set value, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of a stop operation, and a stop control means for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means. (For example, the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13) and the game value giving means (for example, a game value giving means) capable of giving a game value (for example, a medal, a re-game) based on the display result derived to the variable display unit. A game table including the medal payout process of step S108 shown in FIG. 13) and a notification means capable of notifying information indicating an operation condition of the stop operation means, and the lottery results include the plurality of types. The push order bell LCR of the condition device 11 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a) is the first lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is the same (for example, 5000/65536) in any of the set values. ) And the second lottery result (for example, the conditions shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a)) in which the probability of internal winning is the same (for example, 5000/65536) in any of the plurality of types of set values. The push order bell LRC of the device 12) and the third lottery result (for example, FIGS. 8A and 9A) in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values are shown. The stop control means includes the condition device 10), and the stop control means is subject to the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. When operated, the first display result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1) is derived from the variable display unit, and the first lottery result is displayed. In the derived game, when the stop operation means is operated according to a stop operation condition including a second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC) different from the first stop operation condition, the variable display unit is displayed. A second display different from the first display result In the game in which the result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of one payout is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1) is derived and the second lottery result is derived, the stop operating means is the second stop. In a game in which the first display result is derived to the variable display unit and the second lottery result is derived when the operation is performed according to an operation condition (for example, push order LRC), the stop operation means is the first. A game in which the second display result is derived to the variable display unit and the third lottery result is derived when the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition including one stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR). Is a means for deriving the first display result to the variable display unit regardless of the stop operation conditions of the stop operation means when the stop operation means is operated, and the notification means is the first. When the lottery result is derived, the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition is transmitted in a predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A, FIG. 12B, FIG. When the second lottery result is derived, the second notification indicating the second stop operation condition can be notified by the push order effect shown in 36 (a) and (b). It is a means that can be notified in the notification mode, and when the third lottery result is derived, the first notification or the second notification can be notified in the predetermined notification mode, and the lottery result. In the fourth lottery result (for example, the special bell RLC of the condition device 21 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a)), the probability of internal winning is the same in any of the plurality of types of set values. The special bell RCL of the condition device 22) is further included, and the stop control means is such that the stop operation means is the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) in the game from which the fourth lottery result is derived. Alternatively, it is a means for deriving the first display result to the variable display unit when operated according to the second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC), and the notification means is the fourth lottery. The gaming table is characterized in that, when a result is derived, the first notification or the second notification can be notified in the predetermined notification mode.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the time required for discriminating the set value becomes long, the operating rate of the game console can be improved and it can be difficult to discriminate the set value, and the fairness of the player can be achieved. Can be secured.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, reels 110 to 10 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 112) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, settings 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B), and a setting. Based on the set value, a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery in step S201 shown in FIG. 14) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display unit are stopped and displayed. A stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of a stop operation, and a stop control means for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means. (For example, the reel stop process of step S106 shown in FIG. 13) and the game value giving means capable of giving the game value based on the display result derived to the variable display unit (for example, the medal of step S108 shown in FIG. 13). It is a game table provided with a payout process) and a notification means capable of notifying information indicating an operation condition of the stop operation means, and the lottery result is internally won by any of the plurality of types of set values. The first lottery result (for example, the push order bell LCR of the condition device 11 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) having the same probability (for example, 5000/65536) and the plurality of types of settings are set. The second lottery result (for example, the push order bell LRC of the condition device 12 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a)) in which the probability of internal winning is the same for all of the values (for example, 5000/65536). And the third lottery result (for example, the common bell of the condition device 10 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values. , And the stop control means is variable when the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. The first display result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 10 payouts is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1) is derived on the display unit, and the stop operation is performed in the game in which the first lottery result is derived. When the means is operated according to a stop operation condition including a second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC) different from the first stop operation condition, the first display result is displayed on the variable display unit. Different second display result (eg winning line L In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 1 payout number is derived (stop display) and the second lottery result is derived, the stop operation means is the second stop operation condition (for example, push). In a game in which the first display result is derived to the variable display unit and the second lottery result is derived when the operation is performed according to the order LRC), the stop operation means is the first stop operation condition (1st stop operation condition (forward LRC). For example, when the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition including the push order LCR), the second display result is derived to the variable display unit, and the stop operation means is used in the game in which the third lottery result is derived. When operated, it is a means for deriving the first display result to the variable display unit regardless of the stop operation condition of the stop operation means, and the notification means derives the first lottery result. In this case, the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition is transmitted in a predetermined notification mode (for example, the display of SEG1 to SEG6 shown in FIG. 12A, FIGS. 12B, 36A, It is possible to notify by the push order effect shown in b), and when the second lottery result is derived, the second notification indicating the second stop operation condition can be notified by the predetermined notification mode. When the third lottery result is derived, the first notification or the second notification can be notified in the predetermined notification mode, and the lottery result includes the first notification. The special bell RLC of the condition device 21 and the special bell RCL of the condition device 22 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 9 (a), which are different from the lottery result or the third lottery result. ) Is further included, and the stop control means is such that the stop operation means is the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) or the second stop operation in the game from which the fourth lottery result is derived. In a game in which the first display result is derived to the variable display unit and the fourth lottery result is derived when the operation is performed according to a condition (for example, push order LRC), the stop operation means is the first. When the operation is performed according to the third stop operation condition (for example, push order CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL) different from any of the stop operation condition and the second stop operation condition, the variable display unit displays the second. Is a means for deriving the display result of the above, and the notification means can notify the first notification or the second notification in the predetermined notification mode when the fourth lottery result is derived. It is a game table characterized by being a means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the time required for discriminating the set value becomes long, the operating rate of the game console can be improved and it can be difficult to discriminate the set value, and the fairness of the player can be achieved. Can be secured.

Further, in the first display result, a third display result in which a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell-aligned symbol combination) is derived from the first line of the variable display unit (for example, the upper effect line L2). And a fourth display result in which the predetermined symbol combination is derived to a second line (for example, a downward-sloping effect line L4) different from the first line of the variable display unit. In the game in which the first lottery result (for example, the push order bell LCR of the condition device 11 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A) is derived, the stop operation means is the first stop operation means. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR), the third display result is derived to the variable display unit, and the second lottery result (for example, FIGS. 8A and 9). In the game in which the push order bell LRC of the condition device 12 shown in (a) is derived, when the stop operation means is operated according to the second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC), the variable display unit. The fourth display result is derived from the above, and the fourth lottery result (for example, the special bell RLC of the condition device 21 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A and the special bell RLC of the condition device 22) is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, push order LCR) in the derived game, the third display result is derived to the variable display unit, and the fourth display result is derived. When the stop operation means is operated according to the second stop operation condition (for example, push order LRC) in the game from which the lottery result is derived, the fourth display result is derived to the variable display unit. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make various combinations of symbols derived (stop display) to the variable display unit according to the stop operation conditions, and it is possible to make it difficult to determine the set value.

Further, the fourth lottery result may be a lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is the same in any of the plurality of types of set values.

With such a configuration, the degree of difficulty in determining the set value can be made uniform regardless of the set value.

Further, the game value-giving means gives a predetermined amount of the game value when the first display result is derived, and when a display result different from the first display result is derived, the game value-adding means gives a predetermined amount of the game value. The means may not give the predetermined amount of game value, and the game value-adding means may be replayed as the game value when the first display result or the second display result is derived. It may be a means to give.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the combination of the first lottery result and the second lottery result is not limited to the push order bell LCR and the push order bell LRC, for example, the push order bell CLR and the push order bell CRL, or the push order bell CRL. It may be a forward bell RLC and a push forward bell RCL.

<Other embodiments>
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 53 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals in the description of the present embodiment are shown in the drawings. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 53. In addition, the examples of this embodiment and the examples of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification for notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is "forward push operation order" is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is described as lighting, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine will be described. The control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit to control the main effects. It is composed of a first sub-control unit to perform the operation and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control unit is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send commands and other signals to the first sub-control unit, but the first sub-control unit controls the main control. Cannot send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control command. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described.

The design displayed on the upper part of the left reel is the upper part of the left reel, the design displayed on the middle part of the left reel is the middle part of the left reel, the design displayed on the lower part of the left reel is the lower part of the left reel, and the upper part of the middle reel. The displayed symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel is the middle symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel is the lower symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel is. The design displayed on the upper right reel, the middle design on the right reel is called the middle design on the right reel, and the design displayed on the lower stage on the right reel is called the lower design on the right reel. A total of nine are displayed on each reel, three in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, one winning line of the middle-stage winning line composed of the left-reel middle-stage symbol, the middle-reel middle-stage symbol, and the right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. The winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine of the present embodiment can bet three or two medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is valid and three or two medals are inserted. The winning line is activated when bet is placed. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Moreover, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, the right-down winning line consisting of the left reel upper symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right reel lower symbol, the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right reel upper symbol are composed. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination, and remarks, and is shown in FIG. ) Is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order.

A plurality of types of symbols (for example, replay symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol, bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 43 (a)) are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (for example, 20 frames) on each reel 110-112. ..

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles (special role 1, special role 2) and general roles (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, privilege push order bell), etc. There is. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, Includes special role 2 and winning a replay role.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special) If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is).

The "re-gaming role" is a winning role (acting role) that allows the player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 4)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small role 1 (watermelon), small The role 2 (cherry) is as shown in FIG. 43 (a), such as "cherry-ANY-ANY". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small role 1 (watermelon) and small role 2 (cherry) are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer timing, and in the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the design of the left reel 110 is "cherry". It is sufficient, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used. Further, as will be described in detail later, the small winning combination 3 and the small winning combination 4 are the winning combination that can be won by operating the correct answer pressing order. In some cases.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control selects one from a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance based on a predetermined condition (result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination), and is based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, the control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally elected, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of the prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Pushing order bell>
Next, the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 43 (b).

<Normal push order bell>
If any of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (small wins 3 and small wins 4 in this example) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. It is possible to internally win the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" regardless of the set value of the settings 1 to 6. It should be noted that additional small wins may be combined to win duplicates.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". It is subdivided into the pressing order (operation order) of, and in this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pressing order. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push orders is the same.

For example, when the "normal push order bell 1 LCR" of the "normal push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "normal push order bell 4 CRL" of the "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-replay" corresponding to one small role (small role 4) wins a prize. If it is displayed on the line and one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be removed (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "small winning combination 4" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or the small winning combination 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line). In some cases), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the operation order. 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small role 4 is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out or the small role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

In the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of push orders, the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" If any of the above is won internally, there is a 1/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If any of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (small wins 3 and small wins 4 in this example) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value being set to any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6". It should be noted that additional small wins may be combined to win duplicates. Further, the combination of the small winning combination may be different between the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing order, and the six types of pressing order are set. Twelve small wins (small wins 3) are assigned to five of them. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push orders is the same.

For example, when the "privilege push order bell 1 LCR" of the "privilege push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). In addition, when the "privilege push order bell 4 CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 "Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the 12-card small role (small role 3) will win a prize. Displayed on the line.

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "small winning combination 3" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-replay" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is displayed on the winning line. One medal will be paid out.

In the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of the 6 types of push orders, "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" If any of the above is won internally, there is a 5/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6. In addition, even if any of the privilege push order bells 1 to 6 is internally won, the number of cards to be paid out will not be reduced to 0. Therefore, it is easy for the player to notice that he has won the privilege push order bell.

<Advantageous section, non-advantageous section>
Next, the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 44A. FIG. 44A is a diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than this non-advantageous section. After the power is turned on or after the set value is changed, a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state, and when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this non-advantageous section (for example, when a re-game combination is won in a certain game). In addition, an advantageous section is set from the next game.

In addition, when the non-advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this advantageous section (for example, when the AT state shifts from the normal state to the AT state and the AT state ends, or when the limiter is reached, etc.), the game will not be performed from the next game. The advantageous section is set, and the navigation count counter 2 is initialized to 0.

Here, the navigation count counter 2 is a counter that indicates the cumulative number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation for acquiring one card executed when the privilege push order bell is internally won), and has shifted from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. It is initialized to 0 when the case or RAM clear is executed, and 1 is added every time the navigation is executed in the advantageous section. Although the details will be described later, the navigation number counter 2 is used when the numerical value of the navigation number counter 2 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Type of game state>
Next, the gaming state and transition of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has a gaming state including at least a normal state, a first chance state, a second chance state, and an AT state, in addition to the above-mentioned advantageous section and non-advantageous section.

<Normal state>
After the power is turned on or the set value is changed, the normal state is set as the initial state. When the condition for shifting to the first chance state is satisfied in this normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 1 reaches 50), the game shifts to the first chance state from the next game. It is a state that includes a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

Here, the navigation count counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of executions of the privilege push order bell navigation (navigation for acquiring one sheet), and is used when the first chance state is changed to the normal state or the RAM is cleared. Is initialized to 0 when you execute, etc., and every time you perform a navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 card) that suggests the operation order to win the privilege push order bell and win a prize in 1 small role (small role 4). 1 is added to. Although the details will be described later, the navigation count counter 1 is used when calculating the navigation compliance rate, when displaying the numerical value of the navigation counter 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the like.

In addition, when the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/300) is won), the next time. Move from the game to the second chance state. Further, when the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game.

<First chance state>
The first chance state is a state in which it is possible to shift to the second chance state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this example, the first chance state is 5 games (fixed), and each game is a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the second chance state (a lottery to shift to the second chance state. This example. Then, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/5) will be performed.

When the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in this first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second state is won), the next game is changed to the second chance state. Transition. In addition, when the conditions for transition to the normal game are satisfied in the first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state is not won), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game. At the same time, the navigation count counter 1 is initialized to 0.

<Second chance state>
The second chance state is a state in which an AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the first chance state. In this example, the second chance state is 5 games (fixed), and each game is a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the AT state (AT transition lottery. In this example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/10. )I do.

When the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in this second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game. In addition, when the transition condition to the normal game is satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is not won), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game.

In this example, the configuration does not shift from the AT state to the second chance state, but it may be possible to shift. In this case, since it is the second chance state via the AT state, the AT transition lottery is won. The probability is halved regardless of the navigation compliance rate described later, and it is preferable that the game playability is different from that of the second chance state that does not go through the AT state.

<AT state>
The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (30 games per set in this example), which is more advantageous to the player than other game states.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) for whether or not to continue the AT game is executed in the start game of the AT game, and when this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (for example, a lottery for continuing the AT game) is executed. In this example, an AT game (30 games per set) is given, and the AT state is extended.

When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in this AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are digested), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game.

The privilege given to the player in the AT state is not limited to the granting of the AT game. For example, the period of the AT game may be extended (for example, from 30 games to 40 games), or the period in the AT state may be extended. The probability of winning the extended lottery may be increased (for example, increased from 10% to 20%), or the rate of entry into the specialized zone (extension decision-only period) in the AT state may be increased (for example, increased from 20% to 30%). ), The extension decision rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, an average of 10 games added to an average of 30 games added), or the navigation rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 80% to 100%). May be raised).

<Navigation compliance rate>
Next, the navigation compliance rate will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

In the game table according to the present embodiment, when the privilege push order bell is won in the normal state, a navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests an operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is performed. , Add 1 to the navigation count counter 1. Then, when the player performs an operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation, it is treated as if the correct answer pressing order operation has been performed, and 1 is added to the correct answer operation counter indicating the number of times of the correct answer pressing order operation. When an operation that does not follow the one-sheet acquisition navigation is performed, it is treated as if an incorrect answering order operation was performed, and 1 is not added to the correct answer operation counter.

In this example, the navigation count counter 1 and the correct answer operation counter are updated during the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state, and the correct answer operation counter is divided by the navigation count counter 1. The navigation compliance rate is calculated, and based on this navigation compliance rate, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery in the AT state are changed.

Further, in this example, there are a case where the stop operation according to the one-sheet acquisition navigation is continued for a certain period and a case where the stop operation not following the one-sheet acquisition navigation is continued for a certain period. Is designed so that the interests of the players are almost the same over a long period of time. In addition, if the stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation is continued, the consumption of medals will increase in the normal state, but it will be advantageous in the later game, but the stop operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation. If you continue, the amount of medals consumed will decrease during normal times, but it will not be advantageous in later games.

For this reason, the player has no choice but to finish in front of the ceiling by distinguishing between a stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation and a stop operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation according to his / her budget. , It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is finished without hitting, and the player's willingness to play is not diminished.

The navigation compliance rate may be calculated by another method. For example, every 100 games, the number of times the player does not follow the navigation for acquiring one card may be determined, and if the number of times is 0, the player may reset (set the navigation compliance rate to 100%). In this case, it may be possible to make it less affected by the game history of other players. Alternatively, the number of times the player does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation system may be simply counted, and the winning probability may be changed according to the count value. In this case, the processing load related to the calculation may be reduced. This is the same in other states.

The winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery in the AT state are based on other numerical values instead of (or in addition to) the navigation compliance rate. It may be changed. For example, even if the navigation compliance rate is low, if the number of operation mistakes is small, it may be treated as having a high navigation compliance rate.

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (first chance state)>
FIG. 45A is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state.

As mentioned above, in the first chance state, if you win the 1/5 winning probability transition lottery, you will shift to the second chance state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90% Raises the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/3, and when the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, raises the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/4 and navigates. If the compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is maintained.

That is, in the first chance state, if the navigation compliance rate is high in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), the winning probability of the transition lottery Will be higher, and it will be easier to move to the second chance state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more you perform the correct answer pressing order operation according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one piece) that suggests the operation order to make the small role (small role 4) win, the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the transition to the second chance state. It will be easier to do.

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation system in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the second chance state. It is possible to realize the ball output rate and playability in line with the intention of.

The ease of transition from the first chance state to the second chance state may be the same regardless of the navigation compliance rate. Further, when the operation is performed according to the navigation (when the navigation compliance rate is high), the matters related to the second chance state determined in the first chance state may be configured to be advantageous, for example, the second chance. You may extend the length of the state period (resulting in easier transition to AT status) or increasing the ease of winning the second chance status lottery (resulting in transition to AT status). It may be easier to do).

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (second chance state)>
FIG. 45B is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the winning probability of the transition lottery in the second chance state.

As mentioned above, in the second chance state, if you win the 1/10 winning probability transition lottery, you will shift to the AT state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%, you will shift. The winning probability of the lottery is increased from 1/10 to 1/8, and when the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is increased from 1/10 to 1/9, and the navigation compliance rate is increased. If it is less than 70%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is maintained.

That is, in the second chance state, if the navigation compliance rate is high in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), the winning probability of the transition lottery Becomes higher, and it becomes easier to shift to the AT state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct answer pressing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning the small role (small role 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery and the easier it is to shift to the AT state. ..

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation system in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the AT state. It is possible to achieve a ball output rate and playability in line with this.

<Navigation compliance rate and set continuous lottery (AT state)>
FIG. 45 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery.

As mentioned above, in the AT state, if you win the set continuation lottery with a winning probability of 1/4, 30 games per set will be given and the AT state will be extended, but the navigation compliance rate will be 90%. If it exceeds, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery is increased from 1/4 to 1/2, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery is increased from 1/4 to 1/3. If the navigation compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery is maintained.

That is, in the AT state, if the navigation compliance rate is high in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), the winning probability of the set continuation lottery is high. Therefore, the AT game is likely to be given in the AT state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct answer pressing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning the small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the easier it is for the AT game to be given in the AT state.

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of continuing the set, which is in line with the intention of the game table designer. It is possible to realize the ball output rate and playability.

<Various navigation>
Next, various navigations will be described with reference to FIG.

<Various navigation / non-AT state>
FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of various navigation systems in a non-AT state.

In this example, in the non-advantageous section (non-AT state), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation (1 piece acquisition) suggesting the operation order to win one small role (small role 4). Navi) and Navi (Navi for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning a prize in the 12-card small role (Small role 3) are not executed.

This non-advantageous section (non-AT state) is a period in which there is an extremely high possibility of staying after the setting is changed (immediately after the opening of the game store), and it is difficult to immediately shift to the AT state. That is, since it is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the advantageous section, by not navigating in this non-advantageous section, it is easier to win 12 small wins (small win 3) (5/6). There is a probability of winning 12 small wins (small win 3).

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation suggests the operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) (navigation for acquiring one pushing order). , And the navigation that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3) (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) is not executed, but if you win the privilege push order bell, some With the exception of, the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is executed.

In this advantageous section (non-AT state), when the privilege push order bell is won, the normal push order bell is won in the AT state because the player wants to strongly urge the player to operate according to the one-card acquisition navigation. The notification mode is different from that of the 12-sheet acquisition navigation (for example, the navigation described later using FIG. 46 (c)) performed in the case.

Specifically, in the AT state, a sound effect (navigation sound) different from the 12-card acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won is output, and a display suggesting the operation order (RCL in this example) is displayed. By surrounding the surroundings with the effect image EF, the player is alerted to strongly urge the player to operate according to the one-sheet acquisition navigation.

The mode of the one-card acquisition navigation performed when the privilege push order bell is won in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is not particularly limited, and for example, the color of the navigation image may be different (for example,). If the image of the 12-sheet acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is black, it may be displayed in red). Further, the display position of the navigation image may be different (for example, when the position of the image of the 12-sheet acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is below the display area, the display is displayed. It may be displayed in the center of the area). In addition, it is preferable to turn on the dedicated lamp or turn off the lamp that is always lit so that the player can easily notice it.

FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state).

As described above, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), the navigation is not performed when the normal push order bell is won, so that the navigation execution frequency in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is lower than that in the AT state. Therefore, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), the player who is accustomed to the operation of the conventional machine is prejudiced that the navigation is not executed, and even if the navigation is performed, the inertia There is a possibility that the forward push operation (incorrect answer push order operation) will be performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when a role other than the privilege push order bell (for example, a replay role) is won, the navigation is performed in the same manner as when the privilege push order bell is won. For example, by increasing the frequency of navigation execution and impressing the player with the execution of navigation, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. The navigation may be performed every time when the re-game combination is won, or the navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every three times). In addition, even when navigating when the re-game role is won, the navigation at the time of winning the re-game role is irrelevant to the navigation compliance rate, and the navigation is more important than when the privilege push order bell is won. Since the degree is low, the effect image EF for alerting may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, even if you do not win the prize (in the case of loss), if you configure it to perform navigation in the same way as when you win the privilege push order bell, you can increase the frequency of navigation and execute navigation. By impressing the player, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. In the case of loss, the navigation may be performed every time, or the navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once in five times).

<Various navigation / advantageous section (AT state)>
FIG. 46 (c) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state).

In the advantageous section (AT state), when the normal push order bell is won, with some exceptions, the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win the 12 small wins (small win 3). ) Is executed.

Although not shown, when the player operates according to the navigation system for acquiring 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output when 12 medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out. A display suggesting that the process has been performed (for example, a display including the character string "get 12 sheets") is performed.

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), even if the privilege push order bell is won, 12 small wins (small win 3) are used in the same manner as when the normal push order bell is won, with some exceptions. It is configured to execute a navigation (a navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize.

In addition, even if an incorrect release order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like and a prize is won in 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination 3), a sound effect (payout sound) is produced in the same manner as when the correct answer pressing order operation is performed. ) Is output, and a display suggesting that 12 cards have been paid out (for example, a display including the character string "Get 12 cards") is displayed. Since the AT state is a state in which many medals are given to the player, even if the player performs an incorrect release order operation, if the player can obtain 12 medals, the correct answer order is obtained. By executing the same effect as the operation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from diminishing in the AT state.

In this example, when the privilege push order bell (for example, the privilege push order bell 1) is won, any one of the five push orders excluding the 12-card acquisition navigation (for example, the LCR push order) However, if you select one of multiple types of 12-card acquisition navigation, and you select the navigation by lottery, the order of pressing will be biased. There is no such thing, and fairness can be guaranteed.

Further, when selecting any one of a plurality of types of 12-card acquisition navigation, a predetermined navigation may be executed. For example, when the privilege pressing order bell 1 is won, the privilege pressing order may be executed. By executing the navigation (predetermined navigation) that is executed when the bell 2 is won, the control burden related to the determination of the push order can be reduced.

Further, during the AT game, a navigation system that reduces the operation conditions (for example, a navigation system that reduces the number of pressing order options, a navigation system that reduces the difficulty level of the operation by widening the pressing range, etc.) may be executed. For example, when the privilege push order bell 1 is won in a game other than the AT game, the so-called 6-choice push order navigation that specifies the order of the LCR is executed, while the privilege push order bell 1 is won in the AT game, "First By executing the so-called three-choice push order navigation that specifies "stop the middle reel", the player can easily perform the operation during the AT game, and the satisfaction level of the player can be increased.

In addition, if one, a plurality, or all of the processes for executing the predetermined navigation and the processing for executing the navigation with fewer operation conditions during the AT game are applied, the push order can be determined. While reducing the control burden involved, it is possible to reduce the operation mistakes of the player during the AT game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

<Navigation counter>
Next, the navigation count counter will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example of the navigation count counter.

The state shown in FIG. 3 (i) is a state in which the navigation display is started. In this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is pressed in the reverse push operation order (LCR) based on the winning of the privilege push order bell 6. The navigation that prompts the operation and the display of the effect image EF have started.

Further, in the same state, the value of the current navigation count counter 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 provided in the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the counter 2 provided below the counter 1 display area CT1. The numerical value of the current navigation count counter 2 is displayed in the display area CT2.

Although the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are displayed as numerical values that match the numerical values stored internally, there are cases where a numerical value that does not match the numerical value stored internally is displayed. For example, immediately after the power is turned on, both the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 display 0, so that the numerical value stored internally may not match.

As described above, the navigation count counter 1 is a counter indicating the total number of times the privilege push order bell navigation is executed. In this example, the total number of times the privilege push order bell navigation is executed at the start of the game is 1. Therefore, the numerical value 1 is displayed. Further, the navigation count counter 2 is a counter indicating the total number of navigations in the advantageous section. In this example, since the total number of navigations in the advantageous section at the start of the game is 14, a numerical value of 14 is displayed. ing.

The following state shown in FIG. 6 (ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the first stop reel as the right reel 112. In this example, the first stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the first stop operation (right) (the image in which 1 is circled in this example) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, 2 is circled). Image) is enlarged.

The following state shown in the figure (iii) is a state in which the second stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 138) is performed with the second stop reel as the middle reel 111. In this example, the second stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (the image in which 2 is circled in this example) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the third stop operation (left) (in this example, 3 is circled). Image) is enlarged.

The state shown in the following figure (iv) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed with the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and in this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation (the image in which 3 is circled in this example) prompting the third stop operation (left) and the effect image EF are deleted.

In addition, in the same state, since one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) was won, the payout process of paying out one medal is executed, and the display suggesting the payout of the medal (in this example, one payout). Display including the character string of "+1" suggesting) has started. In this example, only one medal is paid out, and the number of medals is reduced in the game. Therefore, even if the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order, the medal is paid out. Is configured so that the payout sound (sound effect) is not output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In addition, by the payout process of paying out one medal, it is determined that the player has performed the correct answer pressing order operation according to the navigation, and one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) has been won by the correct answer pressing order operation. The suggestive display (in this example, the display including the character string "success") has started.

The state shown in the following figure (v) is the state after the payout of medals is completed. In this example, the display (+1) suggesting the payout of medals and the correct answer pressing order operation are used to make one small winning combination (small winning combination). The display (success) suggesting that the prize was won in 4) is deleted.

Further, since the total number of times the navigation of the privilege push order bell is executed (navigation number counter 1) is added by one in the game, the numerical value 2 (= 1 + 1) is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. Since the value of the navigation count counter 1 displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 is added by one even when an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like, the player's willingness to play the game. Can be prevented from declining more than necessary.

Further, since the total number of times of navigation (navigation number counter 2) in the advantageous section is added in the game, 15 (= 14 + 1) of the counter 2 display area CT2 numerical value is displayed. The value of the navigation count counter 2 displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2 is added by one even if a winning combination other than the privilege push order bell is won (for example, based on the winning of the replay combination). Since there is a case of navigating, etc.), it is possible to increase the update frequency of the display of the navigation number counter 2, and the player can proceed with the game at a good tempo while appropriately enhancing the effect of the effect.

<Navigation execution period>
Next, the execution period of the navigation will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of the execution period and the non-execution period of the navigation.

As described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the normal push order bell is won, the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is suggested. It is configured so that neither the navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 card) nor the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small role (small role 3) is executed. The period T2b shown in FIG. 48A indicates a period during which navigation is not executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the privilege push order bell is won, with some exceptions, the navigation (1) suggesting the operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4). It is configured to execute the sheet acquisition navigation), and the period T1a shown in FIG. 48A indicates the period for executing the sheet acquisition navigation.

In addition, when the transition to the AT state is confirmed, that is, in this example, the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), or When the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation count counter 2 reaches 300), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation for acquiring one card The period T1b shown in FIG. 48A indicates a period during which the navigation for acquiring one sheet is not executed (a period during which the AT confirmation is notified).

In this period T1b (the period during which the AT confirmation is notified), as shown in FIG. While displaying a video related to AT confirmation), it is configured not to execute the navigation for acquiring one image.

In the period T1b (the period during which the AT confirmation is notified), the AT game has not started, but reducing the number of balls is disadvantageous to the player. Make it easier to win a prize in a single role (small role 3). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player without giving an excessive disadvantage to the player.

Depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that more 1-card combination (small combination 4) will be won than 12-card combination (small combination 3) (from the start of notification of AT confirmation to the start of AT game). In that period, the number of medals to be paid out will be reduced.) Therefore, if it is judged that the number of medals to be paid out is small, when the privilege push order bell is won, 12 It may be configured to perform a navigation (a navigation for acquiring 12 medals) that suggests an operation order for winning a small winning combination (small winning combination 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the feeling of unfairness among the players and increase the satisfaction of the players. During this time, when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12 small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is judged that the number of payouts is small. If this is the case, the possibility of increasing the number of payouts at an early stage can be increased.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 46 (c), in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, when the normal push order bell is won, 12 small wins (small win 3) It is configured to execute a navigation (a navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize, and the period T2a shown in FIG. 48 (a) indicates a period for executing the navigation for acquiring 12 cards. ..

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation (12 cards acquired) suggesting the operation order to win the 12 small wins (small win 3). The navigation system is configured to be executed, and the period T1c and the period T1e shown in FIG. 48A indicate the period for executing the 12-card acquisition navigation system.

In the period T1c, as shown in FIG. 3C, while performing AT during AT notification (in this example, displaying a moving image related to the AT state) to notify that AT is in progress, 12-sheet acquisition navigation is executed. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play during AT can be further enhanced.

Similarly, in the period T1e, as shown in FIG. 3E, the ending notification (in this example, the display of the moving image related to the ending) is performed to notify that the ending period of the AT is reached, and 12 images are acquired. It is configured to execute the navigation system. With such a configuration, even in the ending period when the end of the AT state is near, the player can comfortably proceed with the game, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in a certain period (in this example, the period of continuous judgment of AT) in the advantageous section (AT state), even if the normal push order bell is won or the specific push order bell is won. It is configured so that the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) suggesting the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not executed, and the period T2c and the period T1d shown in FIG. 48 (a) are 12 Indicates the period during which the navigation for acquiring sheets is not executed.

In the period T1d, as shown in FIG. 3D, an AT continuation judge effect for notifying that the AT is being continuously judged (in this example, a moving image regarding the presence or absence of the AT set continuation is displayed. For example, the following set is displayed. It is configured so that the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is not executed while performing the production (the production that shows whether or not to execute it by the conclusion (win or defeat) of the battle production). With such a configuration, the display of the navigation does not hinder the visibility of the AT continuation judge effect, and the player can fully enjoy the effect.

Depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that more 1-card combination (small combination 4) will be won than 12-card combination (small combination 3). Therefore, the number of medals to be paid out is managed during this period. If it is determined that the number of medals to be paid out is small, when the privilege push order bell is won, a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 medals) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12 small medals (small medals 3) is performed. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the feeling of unfairness among the players and increase the satisfaction of the players. During this time, when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12 small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is judged that the number of payouts is small. If this is the case, the possibility of increasing the number of payouts at an early stage can be increased.

<Modification example>
Next, a modified example of the game console according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53.

<Mode in normal game>
FIG. 49A is a diagram showing an example of the mode in the normal state and the count value of the navigation count counter 2 corresponding to each mode, and FIG. 49B is a diagram showing the navigation compliance rate and the lottery for each mode. It is a figure which showed an example of a value.

In this example, the normal game is provided with three modes, modes 1 to 3. When the transition condition to the normal game is satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are digested), the lottery data shown in FIG. Based on the above, any one of modes 1 to 3 is selected by lottery, and when the normal state is entered, the mode is shifted to the mode selected by lottery.

Here, the mode 1 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 500 in the normal state. Further, the mode 2 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 400 in the normal state. Further, the mode 3 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 300 in the normal state.

For example, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state exceeds 90%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 50/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 30/100, and 20/100. Select mode 3 with probability.

If the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is in the range of 70% to 90%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 70/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 20/100, and 10 / Mode 3 is selected with a probability of 100.

If the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is less than 70%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 90/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 5/100, and a probability of 5/100 is selected. Select mode 3.

That is, in this example, the higher the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state, the easier it is to select the mode (mode 3 in this example) that facilitates the transition to the AT state. With such a configuration, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to facilitate the transition to the AT state, which is in line with the intention of the game table designer. It is possible to realize a ball output rate and playability.

<Example of modification of the display of the navigation counter>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display of the navigation count counter.

In the above embodiment, even when an operation other than the correct operation order is performed due to an operation error or the like, 1 is added to the navigation count counters 1 and 2 to display the added value. In this example, when an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like, 1 is not added to the navigation count counters 1 and 2. The numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 are display of numerical values that match the numerical values stored internally.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 6 (i) is the state in which the navigation display is started. In this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is reverse-pressed based on the winning of the privilege pressing order bell 6. The navigation that prompts the operation in order (LCR) and the display of the effect image EF are started.

Further, in the same state, since the total number of times of navigation of the privilege push order bell at the start of the game is 1, a numerical value of 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 and the navigation in the advantageous section at the start of the game is performed. Since the number of times of integration is 14, a numerical value of 14 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT2.

The following state shown in the figure (ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed by an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation. In this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination) are performed. Since neither 3) nor one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) was won, the navigation and effect image EF are deleted, and the payout process causes the player to perform the correct answer pressing order operation without following the navigation. It is determined that the stop operation of is performed, and the display suggesting that the image is lost (in this example, the display including the character string "failure") is started.

The state shown in the following figure (iii) is the state after the winning determination, and the display (failure) suggesting that the prize is lost is erased.

Further, in the game, an operation other than the correct push order operation is performed, and the total number of times the privilege push order bell is executed (navigation count counter 1) is not added. Therefore, a numerical value of 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. However, since the total number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) is not added, the counter 2 display area CT2 numerical value 14 is displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the player performs an operation according to the navigation for acquiring 12 medals, an example of outputting a sound effect (payout sound) when paying out 12 medals is shown. In this example, since operations other than the correct operation order (unrecommended operations) were performed, sound effects (payout sounds) should not be output even if a single winning combination (small combination 4) is won. It is configured.

In this example, as a result of performing operations other than the correct answer pressing order operation, it is possible to reduce the number of balls to be ejected. It is not necessary to perform the process of changing the probability of set continuation. Therefore, the control load on the game console can be reduced. It should be noted that if the game playability is such that the game state is changed according to the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2, the game playability is less susceptible to the operation mistakes of other players.

<Example of modification of navigation execution period>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a modified example of the execution period of the navigation system.

In the above embodiment, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is executed, and even when the privilege push order bell is won. , An example of executing the 12-card acquisition navigation is shown. However, as shown in Fig. (I), when the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a1, the 12-card acquisition navigation is executed 100%. Even if the privilege push order bell is won in the period T1c1, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards may be executed 100%.

Further, as shown in the figure (ii), in the advantageous section (AT state), when the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a2, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege push is performed in the period T1c2. If the forward bell is won, 100% of the navigation (for example, "? -1-?" Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157) that notifies only the first stop operation in the correct operation order is executed. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning a 12-card small role (small role 3) is reduced from 5/6 to 1/2, so the difficulty of winning can be increased and the correct operation order is guessed. It is possible to have sex and improve playability. In this case, the first stop operation may be performed on a stop button other than the stop button on the middle reel, but these operations do not pose a problem if they are treated as incorrect answers.

Further, as shown in the figure (iii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a3, 100% of the 12-card acquisition navigation is executed and the privilege push is performed in the period T1c3. If the forward bell is won, the navigation system for acquiring 12 cards may not be executed.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning a 12-card small role (small role 3) is 5/6, so it is practically the same as when executing the 12-card acquisition navigation, but the navigation is executed. It is possible to reduce the frequency of the operation, and the display of the navigation does not hinder the visibility of the effect (for example, the ending effect) in the AT state, and the player can fully enjoy the effect.

<Variation example of navigation>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modified example of the navigation system.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a game with a small number of balls is played by executing a navigation system for acquiring one card in an advantageous section (non-AT state). If you win, you may configure to execute a navigation that does not allow the small role 1 (watermelon) to win a prize.

Specifically, the state shown in the figure (i) is the state in which the navigation display is started, and in this example, the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is supported based on the winning of the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Navi (in this example, "Caution") that prompts you to perform a stop operation (dropped watermelon) so that the combination of symbols to be used ("watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" in this example) is not displayed on the winning line. Display) and the effect image EF are started.

The following state shown in FIG. 6 (ii) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and in this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation and effect image EF that encourage the watermelon to be missed are deleted.

In addition, it is determined by the payout process that the player has performed a stop operation so as to drop the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) according to the navigation, and a display suggesting that the watermelon has been dropped (in this example, "success"". Display including the character string of) has started.

With such a configuration, by controlling the display of the navigation system, it is possible to play a game with a small number of balls, and it is possible to realize a ball ejection rate and playability in line with the intention of the game table designer. It will be possible.

The same navigation may be performed for the small role 2 (cherry), which is the missing role, or the same navigation may be performed for both the small role 1 (watermelon) and the small role 2 (cherry). Further, both the small role 1 (watermelon) and the small role 2 (cherry) can be dropped even if there is no navigation for prompting the drop, so that the game may be playable without navigation. Even if there is no navigation system that encourages omissions, if a predetermined specific operation mode is executed for each game, and a game property that can cause more omissions than when a specific operation mode is not executed for each game is achieved, this specification is specified. The advantage can be changed by using the result of directly or indirectly determining that the operation mode of is executed. Since it is not necessary to change the operation mode every game, it is possible to make the game playability less likely to cause an operation error. Further, by setting the internal winning probability of the winning combination when the specific operation mode is performed to be lower than the internal winning probability of the winning combination when the other operation mode is performed, the specific operation mode can be set. By executing each game, it is possible to reduce the frequency of winning a prize as compared with the case where the specific operation mode is not executed every game.

<Modification example of AT state>
FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a modified example of the AT state, and FIG. 53B is a diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during the AT extension period.

In the above embodiment, the AT state is set to 30 games per set, but as in this example, when there is a push order error (operation other than the correct push order operation) in one set (30 games), the push is made. The number of games in the AT state may be increased according to the order error to extend the AT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are X push order mistakes (operations other than the correct push order operation of the 12-card combination) in one set (30 games), and the 12-card combination is played. If it is missed, the AT state may be extended until the 12-card combination wins X times.

If the AT state is extended until the 12-card winning combination is won by the number of push order mistakes (X times in this example), the profit given to the player may become excessive due to the winning of other winning combination. Therefore, the AT state may be extended until the 12-card winning combination is won less than the number of push order mistakes (X times in this example).

Further, when the AT state is extended, the display displayed at the end of one set (30 games) (for example, the AT end screen as shown in FIG. 3B) is continuously displayed. Since the extension period of the AT state is uncertain and the frequency of extension is low, it is configured not to prepare a special display for extension. In addition, in order to clarify the total number of medals to be paid out, a display indicating the total number of medals to be paid out may be displayed on the AT end screen.

In the advantageous section (non-AT state), it is possible to increase the number of payouts by performing an operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation, so the player who notices this can also do so in the advantageous section (AT state). There is a possibility of performing operations that do not follow the navigation. Therefore, as in this example, if the AT state is extended until the 12-card winning combination is won by the number of push order mistakes, the player's profit can be secured in the extended ATT state. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven. ~ 112) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. An internal lottery means (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more winning combinations or losing, and the inside after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) that performs stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means. Game value giving means (for example, medal payout processing) for giving game value according to the stopped mode of the plurality of stopped reels, and operation information for notifying operation information (for example, operation navigation) in the AT state. A game table including a notification means and a game control means (for example, a process of changing a game state) capable of controlling the progress of a game and changing the advantage, and the game control means is the first. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state. The first game state is terminated and the second game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery) while the game state is set. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first. The game is more likely to be performed by a second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) according to a second operation condition than by a first operation according to an operation condition (for example, a stop operation of RCL). A large amount of value (for example, a medal) can be obtained, and the game control means performs a stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. As the number of times performed in the second operation is smaller, the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be changed to a higher advantage, and the second gaming state is the AT. It is a game table characterized by being in a state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

In addition, "the more times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the lower the advantage of the second gaming state is changed" means "stop of the stop button". The more times the operation is performed in the second operation, the more the advantage regarding the second gaming state is "always" changed to a lower advantage ", and the content is not limited to" the stop button ". The more the number of times the stop operation is performed in the second operation, the more "may" change the advantage regarding the second gaming state to a lower advantage "(described later). The same applies to the game console).

Therefore, for example, the second operation may be performed three times and four times, and the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be set to the same advantage, or the number of times performed by the second operation is four. As a result, the number of times may be set to a higher degree of advantage regarding the second gaming state than the third time due to other factors (for example, lottery, etc.), and further, the first time may be set. Even if the number of times performed in the second operation is 0 (for example, 0 operation mistakes), the advantage regarding the second gaming state may not change.

Further, the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is not limited to a single lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1), but is one of a plurality of lottery results (for example, privilege push order bell 1). It may be any one of ~ 6) (the same applies to the game console described below).

Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, and the small winning combination Z are set as a specific small winning combination group, and the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, or the small winning combination Z is internally elected, the specific small winning combination group is internally elected. (The "specific lottery result" according to the present invention has been derived), the small winning combination X is a winning combination when the left reel is the first stop reel, and the small winning combination Y is the winning combination. It is a winning combination when the one-stop reel is used, and the small winning combination Y is a winning combination when the right reel is the first stopping reel. , The internal winning probability is set low, and the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, and the small winning combination Z may be a combination in which the number of medals paid out when a prize is won is the same (for example, 8 cards).

With such a configuration, if the game in which the left reel is the first stop reel (the game in which the first operation is performed) is continued, the number of medals paid out by the player is reduced, and the middle reel or the right reel is used. If you continue the game with the first stop reel (the game that performed the second operation), the number of medals paid out by the player will increase, but if you continue the game with the left reel as the first stop reel In addition, games such as AT games can be changed advantageously.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), an operation information notifying means for notifying an operation information in an AT state, and a game progress control. , A game table provided with a game control means (for example, a process of transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage, and the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state is a state in which the AT state is more likely to shift than the normal state, and the game control means is different from the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the first game state. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least two game states (for example, a second chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state, the said When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed as the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the stop operation of RCL). ), It is possible to obtain more game value (for example, medal) when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition, and the game control. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the means means that the stop operation of the stop button is performed less frequently in the second operation. However, it is a means that may change the advantage of the second gaming state to a higher advantage, and the second gaming state is the chance state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the chance state increases, so that the first game state It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) that performs stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means that has been stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), an operation information notifying means for notifying operation information in the AT state, and controlling the progress of the game. , A game table provided with a game control means (for example, a process of transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage, and the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state includes a first chance state and a second chance state, and the second chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the one chance state. Is a state in which the higher the advantage is, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the game control means is different from the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the first game state. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state. The setting is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button of the player when a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means. It is a means capable of changing the advantage with respect to the second gaming state, and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. In this case, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by a second operation (for example, LCR, etc.) according to the second operation condition rather than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. The game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the operation is performed by the stop operation), and the game control means is the specific lottery result by the internal lottery means in the first game state. Is derived, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the higher the advantage of the second gaming state may be changed. The second gaming state is a gaming table characterized in that it is a state for shifting to the first chance state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation with respect to the state for shifting to the chance state. , It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation in the first game state, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) that performs stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means that has been stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), an operation information notifying means for notifying an operation information in an AT state, and a game progress control. A game table including a game control means (for example, a process for transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage degree, wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, a normal state) and the game state. It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and it is determined in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the condition of (for example, winning the AT transition lottery). When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in one game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation (for example, according to the first operation condition). For example, it is possible to obtain more game value (for example, medal) when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition than for the stop operation of RCL). The game control means is the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The larger the number, the more the advantage of the second gaming state is changed to a lower advantage. The second gaming state is the AT state, and the first gaming state is changed to the AT state. A plurality of types of modes having different advantages with respect to the transition of the above (for example, modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B) are included, and the game control means performs the stop operation of the stop button. As the number of times performed in the second operation is smaller (for example, the higher the navigation compliance rate is), the mode in the first gaming state may be changed to the mode having a higher advantage regarding the transition to the AT state. It is a game table characterized by being a means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the second advantageous state is increased. It is possible to prompt the player to perform the first operation in the game state of the above, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is easier for the player to shift to the AT state if the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. It is possible to prompt the operation and appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, it is possible to execute a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the first operation by giving a notification prompting the first operation in the first gaming state.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, a notification (for example, acquisition of 12 cards) for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation. Navigation) may be executable.

With such a configuration, in the second gaming state, it is possible to impress the player that the second operation is advantageous by giving a notification prompting the second operation, which has a high player profit. At the same time, the player's profit can be given,
Further, in the game in which the notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

In addition, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and in the first game state, the second by the internal lottery means. When the lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed. Therefore, even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player feels dissatisfied. Can be resolved.

<Navigation count>
Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), a game control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a process for transitioning a game state), and The game control means is a game table provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, AT state, second game state). One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a chance state and a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set (for example,). It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on (winning the AT transition lottery), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed. Is performed by the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, stop operation of RCL). However, when a large number of the game values (for example, medals) can be obtained and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation. The greater the number, the greater the number of games until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, it is updated when the first operation is performed. Reel cow The game table is characterized in that it can display an input value (for example, the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 47).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, since the count value updated when a specific lottery result is derived is displayed, the lottery result can be grasped, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation (for example, one-card acquisition navigation, 12-card acquisition navigation). Navi) may be executable.

With such a configuration, the stop operation can be notified, and the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

Further, the certain count value may be a count value indicating the number of times the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification in the game in which the notification is executed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process) and a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the advantage (for example, a game state). The game table is provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) different from the first game state. , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and is the means capable of setting the second gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the state, the player performs the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, For example, it is possible to obtain more game value (for example, medal) when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition than for the stop operation of RCL). The game control means is the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The smaller the number, the more the advantage with respect to the second gaming state may be changed to a higher advantage, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop bo. It is possible to execute a notification (for example, a navigation system for acquiring one sheet and a navigation system for acquiring 12 sheets) for performing the tongue stop operation by the first operation or the second operation, and in the game in which the notification is executed. , A game table characterized in that it is possible to display a certain count value to be updated (for example, the numerical value of the navigation number counter 2 shown in FIG. 47).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, since the count value indicating the number of times the notification is executed is displayed, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's motivation to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the advantage in the game to a higher advantage as the certain count value becomes larger.

With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

In addition, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed. Therefore, even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player feels dissatisfied. Can be resolved.

<Navigation non-execution period>
Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process) and a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the advantage (for example, a game state). The game table is provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) different from the first game state. , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and is the means capable of setting the second gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation (for example, RCL) according to the first operation condition. The game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition than for the stop operation). When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the game control means reduces the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation. It is a means that may change the advantage of the second gaming state to a higher advantage, and the game control means is used for a specific period in the first gaming state (for example, in FIG. 46A). When the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation in the non-advantageous section shown), it is a means that is not included in the number of times the advantage with respect to the second gaming state is changed. It is a game table to play.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. The game table is provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) different from the first game state. , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first game state is set. It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state, the said When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed as the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the stop operation of RCL). ), It is possible to obtain more game value (for example, medal) when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition, and the game control. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the second. It is a means that may change the advantage of the game state to a higher advantage, and the game control means performs a stop operation of the stop button in a specific period in the first game state. When performed by the second operation, it is a means not included in the number of times to change the advantage regarding the second gaming state, and the specific period is a specific effect (for example, FIG. 48 (b)). It is a game table characterized in that it is a period during which the AT confirmation effect shown in (1) is being executed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process) and a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the advantage in the game (for example). , A game table including a game state transition process), wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game different from the first game state. One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a state (for example, AT state, second chance state, first chance state), and is specified by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. When the lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is second than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. A larger amount of the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained when the second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation conditions, and the game control means is the first. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state. It is a means that may change the degree to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a specific period in the second gaming state (for example, a period T1d shown in FIG. 48A; a continuous judge period in the AT state). When the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, it is not included in the number of times the advantage regarding the second gaming state is changed. It is a game table characterized by being.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, it is possible to execute a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation. , The notification may not be executed for a certain period in the second gaming state.

With such a configuration, the game can be sharpened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, the specific period may be a period in which the change in the game value given to the player is smaller than the period other than the specific period.

With such a configuration, the game can be further sharpened, and the variation of the game can be increased.

Further, when the total amount of the game value given in the specific period is less than a certain amount, the stop operation of the stop button is performed when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. It may be possible to execute the notification to be performed by the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid giving a disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

In addition, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed. Therefore, even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player feels dissatisfied. Can be resolved.

<Navigation when other prize winners are won>
Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process) and a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the advantage (for example, a game state). The game table is provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) different from the first game state. , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), which is a means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states, and is specified by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. When the lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is second than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. A larger amount of the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained when the second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation conditions, and the game control means is the first. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state. It is a means that may change the degree to a high degree of advantage, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first. It is possible to execute the first notification (for example, the navigation for acquiring one image with the effect image EF shown in FIG. 46 (b)) to be performed by the operation, and the first gaming state is described. In order to cause the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation even when a lottery result (for example, replay combination, loss) different from the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. The second notification (for example, the acquisition navigation for one image without the effect image EF shown in FIG. 46B) can be executed, and the second notification and the first notification are at least a part of the modes. It is a game table characterized by the same.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since notification is given even when a lottery result different from a specific lottery result is derived, it is possible to have the player play the game at a good tempo.

Further, in the game in which the first notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the first notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the advantage in the game to a higher advantage as the count value is larger.

With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

In addition, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed. Therefore, even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player feels dissatisfied. Can be resolved.

<Navigation in AT state>
Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 42) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery) and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process) and a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the advantage (for example, a game state). The game table is provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) different from the first game state. One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state), and a specific lottery result (in the first gaming state) by the internal lottery means ( For example, when the privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to a second operation condition rather than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. A larger amount of the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained when the second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the procedure, and the game control means is in the first game state. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, the higher the advantage regarding the second gaming state. It is a means that may be changed to an advantage, and the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell). For example, when the privilege push order bell) is included and the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. However, when the second lottery result is derived and the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and the second When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of the above, a notification (for example, a navigation system for acquiring 12 cards) for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation is provided. It is feasible, and when the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation (for example, , 12-card acquisition navigation) is a game console characterized by being able to execute.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the AT state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, in the second gaming state, in both the case where the first lottery result is derived and the case where the second lottery result is derived, the notification for performing in the second operation is performed. In the second gaming state, it is possible to easily acquire the gaming value without worrying about the lottery result, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player.

Further, when the first lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 1) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. When the second lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 2) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button can be executed. It may be possible to execute the notification for performing the second operation.

Further, the second gaming state may be an AT state.

With such a configuration, in the AT state, it is possible to easily acquire the game value without worrying about the lottery result, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player.

Further, the notification executed when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state and the second lottery result by the internal lottery means in the second game state. The notification executed when is derived may have the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire the game value without being aware of the stop operation, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" according to the present invention may be a combination of different gaming states, for example, a normal state, a CZ state, an AT state, a specialized zone, and the like. In addition to the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, and AT or ART pullback zone.

Further, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" according to the present invention is not limited to winning the AT lottery, for example, the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, and the number of points is the default number of points. It includes the fact that the game has reached, that the player has won (or won a prize) internally in the predetermined condition device, and that the conditions for ending the bonus have been met.

Further, the combination of "first game state"-> "determined condition is satisfied"-> "second game state" according to the present invention is changed to "normal game"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state". Not limited, for example, "CZ state"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Bonus"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Normal state"-> "Number of games is default" "The number of games has been reached"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of games has reached the default number of games"-> "Specialized zone", "Normal game"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points" "Achieved"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points"-> "Specialized zone", "AT state"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points" → "Pseudo-bonus", "Normal state" → "Internal winning (or winning) in a predetermined condition device" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Internal winning (or winning) in a predetermined condition device) It may be "done"-> "bonus", "bonus"-> "bonus end condition is satisfied"-> "normal state", "bonus"-> "bonus end condition is satisfied"-> "AT state", etc. ..

Further, the "operation result of the stop button" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing when the player presses the left reel, for example, the timing when the middle reel or the right reel is pressed, the pressing order of the stop button (forward pressing, forward pressing, (Reverse push), the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed by operating the stop button is also included.

Further, the "easiness to acquire the game value" according to the present invention is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, for example, the ease of adding the difference number in AT and the acquisition of the number of AT sets. Ease of entry into the special zone, high and low frequency of push order bell navigation, ease of transition to good RT on ART machines (high and low probability of push order promotion replay navigation), good RT Ease of transition to, ease of replay navigation execution frequency, ease of continuation of a state where game value is easy to obtain (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state where game value is easy to obtain (for example) It may be easy to shift to AT high probability, AT specialized zone).

Further, the game console according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and the reels which are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and an internal lottery that derives one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more wins or misses. After the means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery) and the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. A stop control means (for example, reel stop control) that performs stop control for causing the game to be stopped, and a game value giving means (for example, medal payout) that grants game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. ) And a game control means (for example, game start state processing and game state update processing) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game value. The game control means is one game from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second game state (for example, an advantageous section) different from the first game state. The state can be set, and the first gaming state is terminated and the second gaming state is set based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set. Is possible, and is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state (for example, the timing when the player presses the left reel 110). It is a means that can change the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games), and the player presses the stop button in the first gaming state. It is easier to obtain player benefits when the second operation according to the second operation condition is performed than when the first operation according to the first operation condition is performed, and the game control means is the first operation. When the second operation is performed more than the first operation in the gaming state of the above, the predetermined condition is satisfied as compared with the case where the first operation is performed more than the second operation. The game table may be characterized in that the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state set after being satisfied may be changed disadvantageously for the player.

According to such a game table, the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state after the transition can be changed depending on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first game state. It is possible to appropriately control the payout of the game value through the first game state and the second game state.

Hereinafter, other embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the game console (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are loaded, and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied are used for a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). The rotation is started by accepting the operation by the start lever), and based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, the operation by the stop button described later), the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of roles is selected by lottery. Judgment is made, each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped is determined. It is a game table that advances a series of games in which a game medium is paid out and the game is ended if the predetermined payout conditions are met, and a game is ended without paying out the game medium if the game medium is not met.

Next, the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 54 to 60 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals in the description of the present embodiment are shown in the drawings. Priority is given to the reference numerals 54 to 60.

In addition, the examples of this embodiment and the examples of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In particular, another embodiment in which the same winning combination as the winning combination shown in FIG. 55 (for example, normal push order bell, privilege pressing order bell) is applied and an operation navigation suggesting the pressing order of the winning combination is executed, and this book. Further effects may be obtained by combining each embodiment of the embodiment.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification for notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is "forward push operation order" is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is described as lighting, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine will be described. The control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit to control the main effects. It is composed of a first sub-control unit to perform the operation and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control unit is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send commands and other signals to the first sub-control unit, but the first sub-control unit controls the main control. Cannot send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control command. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described.

The design displayed on the upper part of the left reel is the upper part of the left reel, the design displayed on the middle part of the left reel is the middle part of the left reel, the design displayed on the lower part of the left reel is the lower part of the left reel, and the upper part of the middle reel. The displayed symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel is the middle symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel is the lower symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel is. The design displayed on the upper right reel, the middle design on the right reel is called the middle design on the right reel, and the design displayed on the lower stage on the right reel is called the lower design on the right reel. A total of nine are displayed on each reel, three in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, one winning line of the middle-stage winning line composed of the left-reel middle-stage symbol, the middle-reel middle-stage symbol, and the right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. The winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine of the present embodiment can bet three or two medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is valid and three or two medals are inserted. The winning line is activated when bet is placed. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Moreover, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, the right-down winning line consisting of the left reel upper symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right reel lower symbol, the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right reel upper symbol are composed. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination, and remarks, and is shown in FIG. ) Is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order.

A plurality of types of symbols (for example, replay symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol, bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 55 (a)) are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (for example, 20 frames) on each reel 110-112. ..

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles (special role 1, special role 2) and general roles (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, privilege push order bell), etc. There is. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, Includes special role 2 and winning a replay role.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special) If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is).

The "re-gaming role" is a winning role (acting role) that allows the player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 4)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small role 1 (watermelon), small The role 2 (cherry) is as shown in FIG. 55 (a), such as "cherry-ANY-ANY". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small role 1 (watermelon) and small role 2 (cherry) are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer timing, and in the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the design of the left reel 110 is "cherry". It is sufficient, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used. Further, as will be described in detail later, the small winning combination 3 and the small winning combination 4 are the winning combination that can be won by operating the correct answer pressing order. In some cases.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control selects one from a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance based on a predetermined condition (result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination), and is based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, the control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally elected, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of the prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Pushing order bell>
Next, the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

<Normal push order bell>
If any of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (small wins 3 and small wins 4 in this example) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. It is possible to internally win the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" regardless of the set value of the settings 1 to 6.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), each of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". It is subdivided into the pressing order (operation order) of, and in this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pressing order. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push orders is the same.

For example, when the "normal push order bell 1 LCR" of the "normal push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "normal push order bell 4 CRL" of the "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-replay" corresponding to one small role (small role 4) wins a prize. If it is displayed on the line and one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be removed (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "small winning combination 4" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or the small winning combination 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line). In some cases), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the operation order. 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small role 4 is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out or the small role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

In the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of push orders, the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" If any of the above is won internally, there is a 1/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If any of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (small wins 3 and small wins 4 in this example) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value being set to any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6".

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), each of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing order, and the six types of pressing order are set. Twelve small wins (small wins 3) are assigned to five of them. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push orders is the same.

For example, when the "privilege push order bell 1 LCR" of the "privilege push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). In addition, when the "privilege push order bell 4 CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 "Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the 12-card small role (small role 3) will win a prize. Displayed on the line.

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "small winning combination 3" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-replay" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is displayed on the winning line. One medal will be paid out.

In the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of the 6 types of push orders, "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" If any of the above is won internally, there is a 5/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning state (RT2). It has RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system game state), and the first control unit determines the AT system game state. The sub-control unit is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 (A).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also.

When the special role 1 is internally won, the state shifts to the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and when the special role 2 is internally won, the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability states (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to on, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag.

In the special role internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed, the game shifts to the special game state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. ..

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described.

The AT-type game state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also called an AT mode.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the push order is internally won. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display and the effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about an advantageous result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), for example, the state shifts to the AT1 state, the AT1 state of the first lap is repeated for a plurality of sets (for example, 2 sets or 10 sets), and then the normal state (normal game state). After repeating multiple sets (for example, 10 sets) of the AT1 state, the route shifts to the AT2 state (ending state), and then the route shifts (returns) to the AT1 state on the second lap, or via the pullback state. Then, there is a route or the like that shifts to the normal game state or the AT2 state.

In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter, referred to as the number of AT games). Further, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a production state. Specifically, the low navigation state production state has a normal state, and the high navigation state production state has a normal state, a final notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. The AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit will be described.
@
@
The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub-control unit acquires the effect information (for example, the effect state, the high navigation state counter, the effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state and the like. , The effect is performed according to the effect state counter and the like. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the AT1 effect is read from the ROM. When it is necessary to update the production data, the production data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the judge effect is read from the ROM and the like is performed. When it is necessary to update the production data, the production data is updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / Overview>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a lottery inside a winning combination) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. ), And the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)). The AT2 state (ending state) shown) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied. The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for the transition to the AT1 state is won), and the second condition includes the above-mentioned first condition. Includes the satisfaction of the second requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to the AT2 state is won), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (the plurality of reels). The advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the first stop mode (for example, the AT1 transition rate 21 shown in FIG. 56B) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the second. When the operation is performed in the operation mode (when the operation is not stopped in the first stop mode), the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 56 (B)). Higher than, advantageous for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first mode of operation (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first mode of stop). The degree (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 56B) was not stopped when the plurality of stop buttons were operated in the second operation mode (for example, the AT2 transition rate was not stopped in the first stop mode). Case) is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 56 (B)).

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / Specific example>
FIG. 56B is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to shift to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. Advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning to shift to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). Probability. Advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement) is 10%.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first). (Advantage for fulfillment of requirement) increased from 20% to 21% (advantage increased), AT2 transition rate (advantage for fulfillment of second requirement) decreased from 10% to 9% (advantage) The degree is lower), 1 point is given, and the total number of point pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" is on the winning line. -Bell-Bell "is stopped at the same pattern combination), and 12 medals are paid out.

Further, in the same state, the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line) (the reels were not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) decreased from 20% to 15% (advantage became lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) was 10%. Has risen to 11% (higher advantage) and no points have been awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate increases. However, it becomes easier to shift to the AT2 state.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state should be more advantageous than the case of following the operation navigation. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is relieved and the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means that grants the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is given more of the game value when it is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when it is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56) that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state relating to whether or not to shift to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56 (A). ) Is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the above It is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery to shift to the AT1 state is won), and the second The conditions include the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if you win the lottery to move to the AT2 state). In the case of a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stops. When the button is operated in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 56B) is obtained by the plurality of stop buttons. The plurality of stop buttons are higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 56B) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 56B) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the first. A game table characterized in that it is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 56 (B)) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Is.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is compared to the case where the operation navigation is followed. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is relieved and the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

The "satisfaction of the second requirement" is not limited to the case where the lottery for transition to the AT2 state is won, for example, when the number of acquired game media reaches a certain number (for example, 1840). Included (as well as other embodiments).

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, a certain counter (for example, the ceiling residual counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D)) for satisfying the first requirement is provided, and one game can be played. The count value of the certain counter may be updated every time the counter is performed, and the notification means may be able to start a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is cut off and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display is used. The count values may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be the one that does not have a case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and it is possible to call attention to the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the advantageous state. , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, in the first specific advantageous gaming state, the second operation navigation is configured to be executable, and the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed. May not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performs the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, even when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may be stopped in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even when the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the satisfaction level of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even so, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, the operation is performed only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. The effect according to the operation may be feasible.

With such a configuration, the difference between the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed and the case where the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed can be easily understood by the difference in the production. In addition to being able to do this, the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. May be done.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The game table is provided, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. Is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value imparting means is more when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of gaming states are configured to impart a large number of the gaming values, the normal advantageous gaming state, the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first specific advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the second condition is When it is satisfied, it is configured so that it can shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement. The first in the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. The advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop. The advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement when stopped in the second stop mode is lower than the advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. , It may be a game table characterized by.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. , Set one of a plurality of game value-added states in relation to the game value-added status (for example, base (so-called machine discount), push order bell acquisition status, navigation compliance rate, etc.). A game table provided with a possible game value-adding state control means, the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state and a first specific advantageous game state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the first specific advantageous gaming state can be transitioned to. , When the second condition is satisfied, the state can be shifted to the second specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement. Includes the fulfillment of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value-adding states are set in at least the normal advantageous game state, that is, the first game value-adding state (for example, a state in which the base is 60%). And a second game value-adding state (for example, a state where the base is 80% m) are included, and the game value-adding state control means has a certain game value-giving situation (hereinafter, "first situation"). In the case of (), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving situation is different from the first situation (hereinafter, referred to as "second situation"). In the case of)), the second game value-giving state can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player with respect to the game value-giving situation than the first situation. , When the first game value-adding state is set in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, a state in which the number of acquired cards (MY) is 0 at the 300th G of the normal advantageous game state). The advantage for satisfying the first requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the second game value-adding state is set, and the first game value-adding state is set. The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when is set is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second game value-adding state is set. It may be a game table characterized by.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / Overview>
The game console described with reference to FIG. 56B is a second when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). The advantage for satisfying the requirement of is the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when not stopped in the first stop mode). Although it was lower than the degree, in the game console according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons were operated in the first operation mode (a plurality of reels were stopped in the first stop mode). The advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement in the case) is that the second stop button is operated in the second operation mode (when it is not stopped in the first stop mode). It is the same as the advantage for satisfying the requirements.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / Specific example>
FIG. 56C is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 56 (C) and 56 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to shift to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. Advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning to shift to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). Probability. Advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement) is 10%.

The following states shown in FIGS. 56 (C) and 56 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first). (Advantage to fulfillment of requirement) increased from 20% to 21% (advantage increased), AT2 transition rate (advantage to fulfillment of second requirement) was maintained at 10% (advantage changed) (Not), 1 point is given and the total number of points pt has increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 56 (C) and 56 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" is on the winning line. -Bell-Bell "is stopped at the same pattern combination), and 12 medals are paid out.

Further, in the same state, the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line) (the reels were not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) decreased from 20% to 15% (advantage became lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) was 10%. (Advantage does not change) and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate changes. do not.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is unknown whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state has a difference in advantage from the case of following the operation navigation. Since it is not provided, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means that grants the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is given more of the game value when it is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when it is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56) that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state relating to whether or not to shift to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56 (A). ) Is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the game can be shifted to the first advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery to shift to the AT1 state is won), and the second condition includes. Includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if you win the lottery to transition to AT2 state), Note: In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are pressed. When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 56C) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the first. The plurality of stop buttons are higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 56C) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. When the operation is performed in one operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 10% shown in FIG. 56C) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the second. It is a game table characterized in that it is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 10% shown in FIG. 56C) when the operation is performed in the operation mode. ..

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is unknown whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is the case where the operation navigation is followed. Since there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

Further, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first Even if the advantage in the specific advantageous gaming state is higher than the advantage in the first specific advantageous gaming state when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. good.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, a certain counter (for example, the ceiling residual counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D)) for satisfying the first requirement is provided, and one game can be played. The count value of the certain counter may be updated every time the counter is performed, and the notification means may be able to start a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is cut off and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display is used. The count values may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be the one that does not have a case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and it is possible to call attention to the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the advantageous state. , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, in the first specific advantageous gaming state, the second operation navigation is configured to be executable, and the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed. May not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performs the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, even when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may be stopped in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even when the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the satisfaction level of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even so, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, the operation is performed only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. The effect according to the operation may be feasible.

With such a configuration, the difference between the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed and the case where the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed can be easily understood by the difference in the production. In addition to being able to do this, the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. May be done.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The game table is provided, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. Is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value imparting means is more when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of gaming states are configured to impart a large number of the gaming values, the normal advantageous gaming state, the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first specific advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the second condition is When it is satisfied, it is configured so that it can shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement. The first in the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. The advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop. The advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement when stopped in the second stop mode is the same as the advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. , It may be a game table characterized by.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. A game table including a game value-adding state control means capable of setting one of a plurality of game value-giving states in relation to the game value-giving status, and the plurality of game states. Includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is met, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state. The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, the second condition includes the satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value-adding states include at least the above. The first game value-adding state and the second game value-adding state, which are usually set in the advantageous game state, are included, and the game value-adding state control means has a certain game value-giving status (hereinafter, hereinafter, In the case of "first situation"), the first game value-giving state can be set, and the game value-giving situation is different from the first situation (hereinafter, "first situation"). In the case of "two situations"), the second game value-adding state can be set, and the second situation is more for the player than the first situation with respect to the game value-giving situation. It is an advantageous situation, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the first game value-adding state is set is the second game value. The advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the granted state is set is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement, and the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the first game value granting state is set is higher. The game table may be characterized in that it has the same advantage as the satisfaction of the second requirement when the second game value-adding state is set.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / Overview>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a lottery inside a winning combination) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state and AT2 state shown) are included, and the first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the advantageous section counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state. The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated for each time, and the second counter related to a certain profit grant (for example, the ceiling residual counter shown in FIG. 57 (A)). The count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state and the lottery result are the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the first When the count values of both the count value and the second count value are updatable and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (the plurality of reels are the first). In the case of not being stopped in the stop mode), only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / Specific example>
FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (3) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 57 (C) and 57 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) in the same state is 900, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) in the same state is 900. It is 550. Here, the ceiling remaining counter is a counter indicating the number of games remaining until the so-called ceiling is reached.

The following states shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the high navigation counter (first). The count value (first count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) is subtracted by one to 549. It has been updated to.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" is on the winning line. -Bell-Bell "is stopped at the same pattern combination), and 12 medals are paid out.

Further, in the same state, the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line) (the reels were not stopped in the first stop mode). From, the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, but the count value (second count) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) is updated. Value) has not been updated.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is updated. However, the count value (second count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) is not updated.

It is terrible to put the player at a disadvantage when the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to this example, the second count value (for example, the ceiling) only when the player follows the operation navigation. Even if the player does not follow the operation navigation while the counter) can be updated, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter) is updated in the same manner as when the player follows the operation navigation. Therefore, fairness can be ensured regarding the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means that grants the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is given more of the game value when it is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when it is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). The plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) which is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation than the normal state. ) Is included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) or an advantageous section counter) is provided, and one game is played in the advantageous state. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated each time it is performed, and a second counter related to a certain profit grant (for example, FIG. 57 (for example, FIG. 57)) is configured. The ceiling residual counter shown in A) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The advantageous state and the lottery result are the first In the case of one lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value are used. When the count value is updatable and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode in the advantageous state, the first count value and the second count value are included. It is a game table characterized in that only the first count value can be updated.

It is terrible to put the player at a disadvantage when the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to the game counter according to the present embodiment, the second is only when the player follows the operation navigation. Even if the count value (for example, the ceiling counter) can be updated, but the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section) is the same as when the player follows the operation navigation. Since the counter) is updated, fairness can be ensured regarding the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

Further, the advantageous state shifts to the normal advantageous gaming state and the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 56A or the AT state). It is configured so that it can shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition satisfies the first requirement. In the case where a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The advantage over satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode is when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It may be higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the advantageous state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and when the second count value reaches the second value, the first specific advantageous gaming state It may be configured to transition to.

Further, when the first count value reaches the first value (for example, the ceiling value), it is configured to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation When the operation according to the above is performed, the second count value is configured to reach the second value before the first count value reaches the first value. It may have been.

Further, the advantageous state includes a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and can be given in the first specific advantageous gaming state. The amount of the game value may be larger than the amount of the game value that can be imparted in the second specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends before the first count value reaches the first value. There may be cases.

Further, the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter display) can be started from the middle of the advantageous state, and the count display indicating the second count value (for example, the ceiling residual counter display) can be started. ) May be displayable up to a certain point in time before the count display indicating the first count value is started.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. May be done.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value-adding means for adding game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. The game value-adding means is a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. Is configured to impart a large number of the game values, and the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display of the operation navigation, and the first regarding the advantageous state. The counter is provided, and the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain profit. It is provided with a second counter for granting, and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as "second count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the case of the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first count value and the second count When both count values of the values are updatable and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first of the first count value and the second count value. It is a game table characterized in that only the count value of is updatable.

<Ending / Overview when ignoring operation navigation>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a lottery inside a winning combination) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56A) and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. The AT1 state shown in FIG. 56 (A) and the second type of specified advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) that can be transferred after the first type of specified advantageous gaming state are included. The first type of specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state, and the second type of identification is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result in the normal advantageous gaming state, the plurality of stop buttons are pressed. When only the game operated in the second operation mode is performed, the normal advantageous gaming state shifts to the second type specific advantageous gaming state without going through the first type specific advantageous gaming state. It is possible.

<Ending when ignoring operation navigation / Specific example>
FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a specific example of the ending when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate (probability of winning the transition to the AT1 state by the transition lottery) in the same state is 20%.

The following states shown in FIGS. 57 (B) (2) to 57 (B) (3) do not follow the operation navigation that prompts the player to perform a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, forward push. It is a state in which the stop operation is performed by the operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" is on the winning line. -Bell-Bell "is stopped at the same pattern combination), and 12 medals are paid out.

Further, in the same state, the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line) (the reels were not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, it has not shifted to the AT1 state (the first type of specific advantageous gaming state).

The following FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (4) are states in which the normal state is changed to the AT2 state (second type specific advantageous game state) of the bonus ending.

Although not shown, in the normal state shown in FIGS. Since it stopped in the stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line) (it was not stopped in the first stop mode), the AT2 state of the bonus ending (the second type) It has shifted to a specific advantageous game state).

On the other hand, FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (5) show the normal ending AT2 from the normal state shown in FIGS. It is a state that has shifted to a state (a second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

In this example, the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, and the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "bell-bell-replay" is aligned on the winning line. Since it stopped in the mode), it has shifted to the normal ending AT2 state (second type specific advantageous game state) via the AT1 state (first type specific advantageous game state).

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation unintentionally is continued. It is assumed that there is a player who does, but according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to get a ball out. Since it is possible to shift to the gaming state, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play until the transition to the second type of advantageous gaming state is achieved while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means that grants the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is given more of the game value when it is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when it is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). The plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of execution of operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 56 (for example, FIG. 56). The normal state shown in A), the first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 56A), and the identification of the first type. A second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 56A) that can be transferred after the advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more than the normal advantageous gaming state. The state is an advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. Yes, in the normal advantageous gaming state, the first lottery as the result of the lottery When the selection result is derived, when only the game in which the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode is performed, the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is changed from the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a gaming table characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type without passing through.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation unintentionally is continued. It is assumed that there is a player who does, but according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain a ball. Since it is possible to shift to the two types of advantageous gaming states, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play until the transition to the second type of advantageous gaming state is achieved while relieving the player's operation error and the like.

Further, when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured so as to be able to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type, and the certain condition includes the satisfaction of a certain requirement in the normal advantageous gaming state. In a certain state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are the first operation mode. The advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the operation is performed in the above is higher than the advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It may be expensive.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state that can be continued until the advantageous state ends.

Further, a counter relating to the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type is provided, and the count value of the counter can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the first type in the advantageous state. If the operation according to the operation navigation of is not performed, the count display indicating the count value may not be updated.

Further, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, at least the first ending (for example, the normal ending shown in FIGS. 57B and 5) and the second ending different from the first ending There is an ending (for example, an extra ending shown in FIGS. 57B and 4), and the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the first ending (for example, the number of games, the frequency of navigation (winning the push order bell)). The frequency of notification at the time, etc.), the execution frequency of full navigation, the amount of medals paid out, etc.) are larger than the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the second ending, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation If the according operation is not performed, even if it shifts to the second ending without shifting to the first ending when shifting to the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type. good.

Further, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, a setting value suggestion display suggesting a set value (for example, a display suggesting that the set value is an even number (or an odd number), and the set value is a specific set value (for example). The display suggesting that the setting 6 etc.) can be displayed, and the frequency with which the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the first ending is such that the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the second ending. It may be more frequent than the frequency.

Further, in the second ending, the setting value suggestion display may not be displayed.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value-adding means for adding game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.
The lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. The game value-adding means is a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. Is configured to impart a large number of the game values, and the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state of the above type is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state with respect to execution, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. When the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, when only the game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode is performed, the first one is taken from the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a game table characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without going through the type of specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. , A plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of game value-added states in relation to the game value-giving status. A game table provided with a game value-adding state control means capable of setting one state from the above, and the advantageous state is a first state that can be shifted to a normal advantageous game state and a normal advantageous game state. A type of specific advantageous gaming state and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state are included, and the first type is specified rather than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state related to ending, and the plurality of game value-adding states are set in at least the normal advantageous game state, that is, the first game value-adding. The state and the second game value-giving state are included, and the game value-giving state control means is said to be the first when the game value-giving situation is a certain situation (hereinafter, referred to as "first situation"). It is possible to set the game value-giving state of the above, and when the game value-giving status is a certain situation (hereinafter, referred to as "second situation") different from the first situation, the second game The value-adding state can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player with respect to the game value-giving situation than the first situation, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state. In the case where the second type of game value-adding state is set, the normal advantageous game state is changed to the second type of specific advantageous game state without going through the first type of specific advantageous game state. It is a game table characterized by being transferable.

<Bell hit production / overview>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).

Further, the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 55). The normal push order bell 1) shown in (b) is included, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of reels are released. Stop in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, a forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value. The granting means is more often when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout) than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts). It is configured to give the game value of.

Further, when the lottery result is the second lottery result and the operation in the third operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are placed on the third stop mode (for example, the winning line). When the operation is stopped in the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned) and the operation in the fourth operation mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed when the lottery result is the second lottery result, the above-mentioned A plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-adding means is such that the plurality of reels are the third. It is configured to give more game value when stopped in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) than when stopping in the stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). ..

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays can be displayed in a certain effect (for example, FIG. 57C) that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result. The certain effect includes the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case of the second lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth operation mode, it is an effect suggesting success (for example, an effect of displaying a character string of "success"), or The probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 5/6) rather than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 1/6). ) Is higher.

<Bell hit production / specific example>
FIG. 57 (C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the bell hitting effect.

In the state shown in FIGS. 57 (C) and 57 (1), in the AT1 state, for example, the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), and the operation navigation for prompting the bell hitting effect (a certain effect) is performed. It is in the executed state.

In the bell hitting effect (a certain effect) of this example, AT1 is performed when the correct answer pressing order operation (in this example, the pressing order operation of the LCR in which 12 medals are paid out) is performed using the liquid crystal display device 157. Notification suggesting that the state should be continued (in this example, the display including the character string "AT1 continues with the correct answer in the push order !!") and the push order guess that conceals all the correct push orders and makes the player guess. Display (in this example, "???" is displayed).

Although not shown, if the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (in this example, the LCR push order operation) (when the player's stop operation hits), the winning line is displayed. The "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is complete (stops in the fourth stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and a production suggesting success (for example, a display including the character string "success") is displayed. The production to be performed) is started.

In this example, when the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (LCR push order operation) is It is 1/6.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. It is in the state where the navigation is executed.

In the bell-hit effect (a certain effect) of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to operate the correct answer pressing order (in this example, any one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC in which 12 medals are paid out). Notification suggesting that the AT1 state is continued when the push order operation) is performed (in this example, the display including the character string "AT1 continues with the correct push order !!") and all the correct push orders are displayed. The push order hit display (in this example, "???" is displayed) that is kept secret and hit by the player.

Further, in this example, the player has a bell hitting effect (a certain effect) based on the normal push order bell 1 (second lottery result) or a bell hitting effect based on the privilege push order bell 6 (first lottery result). In the bell hitting effect (certain effect) based on the privilege push order bell 6 (first lottery result), the push order hit display mode is different so that it can be determined whether it is an effect (a certain effect). (In this example, the square line surrounding the "?" Is thickened). With such a configuration, it can be suggested that the first lottery result, which is advantageous for the player, has been won by the display mode of the bell hitting effect (a certain effect), and the expectation of the player is raised. Can be done.

Although not shown, the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (in this example, any push order operation of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, or RLC) (the player's stop operation is If you win), the winning line will have a lineup of "bell-bell-bell" symbols (stopped in the second stop mode), 12 medals will be paid out, and a production that suggests success (for example). , The effect of displaying the character string "success") is started.

That is, in this example, when the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (LCR push order operation) is It is 1/6, and when the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the player's stop operation is the correct push order operation (LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC). Since the probability of matching the push order operation) is 5/6, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game. The probability of being stopped at is higher.

The game console according to the present embodiment performs an operation navigation in which one card combination is aligned, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the 12-card role, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. According to the above, since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust toward the operation navigation and to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The second lottery result is not limited to the normal push order bell, and if there is a push order combination other than the first lottery result, the other push order combination may be applied.

57 (C) and 57 (3) are diagrams showing a modified example 1 of the bell striking effect, and FIGS. (C), (4) and (5) are diagrams showing a modified example 2 of the bell striking effect. be.

In the bell-hit effect (a certain effect) described with reference to FIGS. (C), (1), and (2), the push-order hit display (“????” ”) Is shown, but as in variant example 1, some non-correct answer pressing orders are disclosed, and some other correct answer pressing orders are concealed and applied to the player. In the production including the ordering display (in this example, the display of "x ??" that discloses that the first stop operation is not the left stop button and suggests that the second and third stop operations are concealed). There may be.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result is derived, the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct answer pressing order operation can be increased, and the player's motivation to play can be improved. can.

Further, as in the modified example 2, a push order guessing display (in this example, the first stop operation is performed) in which a part of the correct answer push order is disclosed and the other part of the correct answer push order is concealed and hit by the player. The effect may include the display of "? 1?") Disclosing that it is the middle stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct answer pressing order operation can be increased, and the player's game You can improve your motivation.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, processing of the winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means that grants the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And the effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order shown in FIG. 55 (b)). A bell 6) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, the normal push order bell 1 shown in FIG. 55 (b)) are included, and the lottery result is the result of the first lottery. In this case, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels have a certain winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as "first winning combination"). It stops in the first stop mode that does not correspond to the winning of (for example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern (for example). , Forward push operation), the plurality of reels have a second stop mode (for example, a "bell-bell-bell" symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the first winning combination). When the lottery result is the second lottery result and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the third operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are released. Stop in a third stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-replay" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) that does not correspond to the winning of a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "second winning combination"). Then, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the fourth operation pattern (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels correspond to the winning of the second winning combination in the fourth stopping mode (for example). , The number of operation patterns that become the second operation pattern is larger than the number of operation patterns that become the fourth operation pattern. In many cases, the game value-giving means is used when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Therefore, it is configured to give more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the lottery result is the result of the lottery. In the case of the second lottery result, the game value is given more when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode. Then, the effect means can execute a certain effect (for example, the bell hit effect shown in FIG. 57C) when the lottery result is at least the first lottery result or the second lottery result. The certain effect, which is configured and executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result, becomes successful when at least the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, ". An effect of displaying including the character string "success"), and the certain effect executed when the lottery result is the second lottery result is such that at least the plurality of reels are in the fourth stop mode. It is a game table characterized by being a successful production when stopped.

There is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player because the player is forced to miss the 12-card role as a result of performing the operation navigation in which the 1-card role is aligned. However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, Since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust toward the operation navigation and to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The first winning combination and the second winning combination may be the same winning combination or different winning combinations. Further, the difference in the operation pattern is not limited to the pressing order of the stop button, and may be a difference in the stop timing of the stop button or the like. Therefore, for example, a stop operation (pressing) may be performed aiming at a specific symbol (for example, a red and blue symbol) on the reel. In this case, for example, red-blue-blue are aligned. In some cases, a successful effect may be executed, and when red-red-blue are aligned, a successful effect may not be executed.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous in terms of display of the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the normal advantageous gaming state and the normal advantageous gaming state. A first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred later is included, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type can be transferred to the specific advantageous gaming state. In the case where a certain requirement is satisfied, the lottery result is the first lottery result in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern. In this case, the advantage for satisfying the certain requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern. You may.

Further, the certain effect is an effect that is started before the operation of the plurality of stop buttons is performed, and is an effect that causes the player to apply the success operation pattern of the plurality of stop buttons. It may be one.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, on the winning line). (A mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, an operation in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation) is performed. And the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-imparting means is such that the plurality of reels are the first. It is configured to give more of the game value when stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) than when stopping in one stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). When the lottery result is the second lottery result and the operation in the third operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are placed on the third stop mode (for example, on the winning line). When the operation is stopped at (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned) and the operation in the fourth operation mode (for example, a forward push operation) is performed when the lottery result is the second lottery result. The plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-imparting means is such that the plurality of reels are the third. When stopped in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards), more of the game value is given than when the game is stopped in the stopping mode (for example, one payout). The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, the bell shown in FIG. 57C). The certain effect includes the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the case where the lottery result is the second lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth operation mode, the effect includes a display suggesting success (for example, a display including the character string "success"). The probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5 /) rather than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 1/6) in a certain game. 6) may be higher.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. (AT1 state, AT2 state) shown) are included, and if the advantageous state has a sustainable right, the certain effect may be performed at least once in the advantageous state.

Further, the lottery result includes a third lottery result (for example, another push order combination) different from both the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the certain effect It may be an effect that may be executed even when the lottery result is the third lottery result.

Further, the advantageous state includes an AT state, and during the period in which the advantageous state is not the AT state, the first operation navigation is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is possible, and in the period of the advantageous state and the AT state, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the execution of the certain effect may be started.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may be the one that has been added.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / Overview>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. , Speaker, etc.).

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, three cards) and the second number (for example, two cards) are bets on the game medium. The second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is playable, and the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state and the AT2 state shown above are included, and the first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the advantageous section counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state. The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated for each time, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D)) can be updated. (2 counters) are provided, and the count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the plurality of counters can be updated in the advantageous state. When the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are said to be in the advantageous state. When not stopped in the first stop mode, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of effects is the first scene (for example, the scene 1 shown in FIG. 58 (A)) and the second scene (for example, the scene 2 shown in FIG. 58 (A)). It is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the above, and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the first game is described. If the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the second game is described. When the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started and then the execution of the first game is started, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game. In the game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Even if the game is broken (even if the plurality of reels are not stopped in the first stop mode), the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the game.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / Specific example>
58 (A) to 58 (C) are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (4) when the operation navigation is ignored, and FIG. 58 (A) shows a case where the three-card game is continued in the continuous production. It is a figure which showed the transition example of the scene of the interlocking production of.

Here, the interlocking effect is an effect that is continuously (or intermittently) executed over a plurality of games, and is composed of a plurality of scenes including the first scene and the second scene. For example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 58 (A) is composed of three scenes, scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3, and scene 2 further includes scene 2-1, scene 2-2, scene 2-3, and the like. It is composed of multiple scenes including.

In this example, when the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the scene 1 (first scene) is directed, the scene 2 (second scene) is performed in the game. Execution of the production of the scene) can be started. In addition, when the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the production of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, the scene 3 (second scene) is performed in the game. ) Production can be started.

That is, in this example, when the three-card betting game is continued during the execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect proceeds.

FIG. 58C is a diagram showing a transition example of the scene of the interlocking effect when the two-card game is executed in the continuous effect.

In this example, when the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started after the game in which the scene 1 (first scene) is directed, the scene 2 (second game) is performed in the game. If the execution of the production of the scene) is not started and then the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started, the execution of the production of the scene 2 (second scene) is started in the game. It is possible.

In addition, when the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the production of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, the scene 3 (second scene) is performed in the game. ) Production can be started.

That is, in this example, when the two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect does not progress. In addition, when a two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the interlocking effect, the next scene of the interlocking effect may be displayed for a moment.

FIG. 58B is a diagram showing a transition example of the scene of the interlocking effect when the operation navigation is executed in the continuous effect.

In the example shown in FIGS. (B) and (1), the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which the scene 1 (first scene) is directed, and the scene. In addition to starting the execution of the 2-1 effect, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the right stop button is pressed), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is started. The execution of the effect of scene 2-3 is started with the pressing operation of It has started.

Although not shown, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the winning line is "" It will stop at the mode where the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and one medal will be paid out.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. (B) and (2), the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which the scene 1 (first scene) is directed. , The operation of starting the production of the scene 2-1 and, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) and prompting the reverse push operation (the operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is started. The execution of the effect of scene 2-3 is started with the pressing operation of It has started. Further, in this example, since the visibility of the effect of the scene 2-4 is lowered, at least a part of the winning effect executed after the third stop operation is not executed during the effect of the scene 2-4. It is configured.

Although not shown, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (this example). Then, the game is stopped at a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and 12 medals are paid out.

As described above, in this example, the game is after the game in which the first scene (scene 1 in this example) is directed, and the lottery result is the first lottery result (privilege in this example). In the case of the push order bell 6), the plurality of reels were not stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line) (operated by the player). Even in the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the navigation, the execution of the effect of the second scene (scene 2 in this example) can be started in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the player is given attention or continuously produced as a penalty. There is a risk of embarrassing the player if the player is interrupted, but according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous production should proceed. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving a lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 55). When the privilege push order bell 6) shown in (b) is included and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation). Is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are in the second operation mode. When the operation (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the above-mentioned In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value giving means has the second stop rather than the case where the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3 cards), which is configured to give more of the game value when stopped in the mode (for example, 12 cards are paid out). (For example, a three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two cards) can be executed. The number and the second number are different numbers, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states are in the normal state ( For example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A) and an advantageous state state (for example, AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) which are more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state are included. A first counter regarding an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) or an advantageous section counter) is provided, and the advantageous state is provided. Each time one game is played in the state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) Is updatable, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D), the counter that counts the remaining number of ATs during AT, and the AT transition) A counter that counts a certain count value for It is possible to update the count values of both the first count value and the second count value when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state. When the execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantage The state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and is more than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous gaming state can be shifted to the specific advantageous gaming state. , Satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state is won), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section) Is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode for satisfying the first requirement. The advantage is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, and one of the plurality of types of effects is produced. Is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the first scene (for example, the scene 1 shown in FIG. 58 (A)) and the second scene (for example, the scene 2 shown in FIG. 58 (A)). When the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene can be started in the first game. If the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game, and the next When the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed in the first game. When the execution of the production of the second scene is possible and the game is after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The game table is characterized in that even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the player is given attention or continuously produced as a penalty. There is a risk of embarrassing the player when the game is interrupted, but according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is continuous. By advancing the production, the player's willingness to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is not performed in the advantageous state, only the count display (for example, the ceiling residual counter display) indicating the first count value can be updated. The count display indicating the second count value may not be updated.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. If it is broken, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed in the second game and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out). Even if there is, a display suggesting the total amount of the game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including the character string "500 sheets acquired") may be started.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5) / Overview>
The game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. Etc.) and.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 55 (b)), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, three cards) and the second number (for example, two cards) are bets on the game medium. The second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is playable, and the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 56 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 56 (A)) which is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state shown) is included, and the first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the advantageous section counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D)) can be updated. ) Is provided, and the count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the plurality of reels are said to be in the advantageous state. When stopped in the first stop mode, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels are said to be the first. When not stopped in the stop mode, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display (for example, a caution display shown in FIG. 59 (A)) that is a display relating to attention to the player and is not an effect display, and is the first display. When the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are the second. Even when the operation is performed in the operation mode of, the specific display is not displayed.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5) / Specific example>
FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (5) when the operation navigation is ignored.

As shown in the figure (A), in this example, in the three-card betting game (first game), a warning display (a certain display) suggesting to the player that the two-card betting game is displayed is displayed. However, in the two-card betting game (second game), it is possible to display a warning display (a certain display).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 3B, the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started in the game after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed, for example, a privilege. The push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is executed, and the player performs the reverse push operation (first operation). This is an example in which a stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation that prompts the operation).

In this example, a warning display (a certain display) is displayed triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is displayed. A warning display (a certain display) is displayed triggered by the pressing operation of it's shown. Further, in this example, the warning display (a certain display) is erased after the third stop operation, and the execution of the effect of the scene 1 is started.

On the other hand, although not shown, the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (first). When the operation navigation that prompts the operation in the operation mode of (1) is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), a warning is issued. It is configured so that the display (a certain display) is not displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and if the player calls attention, etc. It may make the player feel embarrassed, but according to this example, it is possible to display a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-card betting game) that requires attention. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, by not displaying a certain display (warning display), the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's motivation to play can be maintained. can.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 54) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving a lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 54) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 55). When the privilege push order bell 6) shown in (b) is included and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation). When this is done, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, a forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value. In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the granting means is in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game (eg, 3 cards) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3 cards), which is configured to give more of the game value when stopped (for example, 12 cards are paid out). , A three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two cards). And the second number are different numbers, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, for example). The advantageous state (for example, the AT1 state and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 56A), which is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of executing the operation navigation, is included. (For example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 57 (A) and the advantageous section counter) are provided for the above-mentioned advantageous state. Each time one game is played, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) Is updatable, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D), the counter that counts the remaining number of ATs during AT, and the AT transition) A counter that counts a certain count value for It is possible to update the count values of both the first count value and the second count value when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state. When the execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantage The state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and is more than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous gaming state can be shifted to the specific advantageous gaming state. , Satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to the AT1 state or the AT2 state is won), a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the advantage over the satisfaction of the first requirement is that the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the case where the first requirement is satisfied, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display (for example, a display relating to attention to the player and not an effect display). , The alert display shown in FIG. 59 (A), the specific display is displayed when the second game is performed, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, after the transition to the advantageous section). In the case where the AT transition such as the 1G is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Is also a game counter characterized in that the specific display is not displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and if the player calls attention, etc. There is a risk of embarrassing the player, but according to the game console according to this embodiment, there is a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-card betting game) that requires attention. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, a certain display (warning display) is not performed, so that the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's willingness to play. Can be sustained.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, it is provided with an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a first scene (for example, a scene 1 shown in FIG. 58 (A)) and a second scene. (For example, it is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the scene 2 shown in FIG. 58 (A), and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In that case, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In that case, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game, and when the execution of the first game is started next, the first game is started. When the execution of the production of the second scene is possible and the game is after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of Even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, the execution of the effect of the second scene may be started in the game.

With such a configuration, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, by advancing the continuous production, the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's willingness to play is maintained. be able to.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. If it is broken, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed in the second game and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out). Even if there is, a display suggesting the total amount of the game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including the character string "500 sheets acquired") may be started.

FIG. 59 (C) is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in the AT state in chronological order, and FIG. 59 (D) is a diagram showing an example in which a two-card betting game is performed in the AT state in chronological order. It is a figure shown.

In this example, the second state (AT state in this example) is an advantageous state, and the advantageous state is more favorable to the player than the first state (normal state in this example). The first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D), the advantageous section counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated. For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the first game in the advantageous state. When the execution of (for example, a three-card betting game) is started, the count values of both the first count value and the count value related to the count display (for example, the ceiling remaining counter) are updated. When the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated. It is configured as follows.

Further, in this example, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. It is a state and includes a second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 59C and 59D) relating to the certain advantageous state, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state. , The count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “first display”; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display. It is a display including an image showing the updated value of a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 59 (C)), and the certain value is the said. It is a value related to the second count value, and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), when the execution of the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous state. , The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, for example, FIG. 59 (D). As shown in the above, when the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous state, the first count value and the second count value are included. Only the first count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Modification example of advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation>
Next, a modified example of the advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (1), in the AT1 state, for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode). ) Is being executed. The AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT2 state by the transition lottery. The advantage over the satisfaction of the first requirement) is 30%.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (2) are states in which the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation (operation in the second operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "bell-bell-bell" on the winning line. It stops at the mode in which the symbol combinations are aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Further, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line), the AT2 transition rate (first). (Advantage for satisfying the requirements of) has increased from 30% to 31% (the advantage is increasing).

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to stop the RLC (operation in the second operation mode), and for example, the forward push operation (first operation). It is a state in which the stop operation is performed in the operation in the mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the winning line is "" It will stop at the mode where the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and one medal will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line) (the reels were not stopped in the second stop mode). Therefore, the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) has decreased from 30% to 29% (the advantage is low).

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the AT2 transition rate increases and the transition from the AT1 state to the AT2 state becomes easy, but the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation. In the case (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 transition rate decreases, and it becomes difficult to shift from the AT1 state to the AT2 state.

As shown in FIGS. (A) and (4), the AT2 transition rate may be maintained (AT2 transition) when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored). You don't have to change the rate).

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the example shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (1), for example, an operation navigation system in which the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is promoted. Is executed, and the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, a certain effect (in this example, a display including a character string of "Good!" And an output of a sound effect) is started with the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) as a trigger. However, when the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) and the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) are triggered, nothing is displayed. doing.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (2), for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is promoted. This is an example in which the operation navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the left stop button is pressed), the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button is pressed), and the third stop operation (in this example, the right). It is configured so that nothing is displayed when the stop button is pressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (3), for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is urged. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, the first production (in this example, the display including the character string "OK!" And the output of the sound effect) is started with the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) as a trigger. Then, triggered by the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), the second effect (in this example, the display including the character string "I'm good!" And the output of the sound effect). Is started, and then the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) is triggered by the third effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Yoshaa!" And the sound effect. Output) is starting.

In the example shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (4), for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is urged. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, the first production (in this example, the display including the character string "OK!" And the output of the sound effect) is started with the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) as a trigger. Then, triggered by the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button), the second production (in this example, the display including the character string "What are you doing!" And the sound effect Output) is started, and then nothing is displayed when the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is triggered.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and may be another gaming state. Further, the first game is not limited to the three-card betting game, and the second game is not limited to the two-card betting game. Further, the first counter is not limited to the advantageous section counter, and may be another counter related to the advantageous state. In addition, the warning display may be displayed not by characters but by other images or the like. Further, the game value is not limited to a game medium such as a medal, and may be an advantageous privilege for the player (winning of an AT game, granting of an AT game, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the reels are stopped, the plurality of reels are configured to stop in the second stop mode, but the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode depending on the stop position of any one of the plurality of reels (for example, the left reel). It may be configured so as to decide whether to stop at or in the second stop mode. That is, the push order (for example, left, middle, right) is the same in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode, but the stop timing of the left reel may be different. Further, in the above embodiment, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are selected, but there may be a case where the third stop mode (for example, loss) is adopted.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot Machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design Display Window 130-132 Bet Button 135 Start Lever 137-139 Stop Button 156 Effect Button 157 Effect Image Display Device (Liquid Crystal Display Device)
300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 500 2nd sub control unit

Claims (2)

A variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each,
A setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player, and
Based on the set value, a lottery for the internal winning of the winning combination is performed, and the lottery result can be derived.
A stop operation means capable of a stop operation for displaying the variable display unit,
A stop control means that controls the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation content of the stop operation means.
A game value-adding means capable of adding game value based on the display result derived to the variable display unit, and
A game console provided with a notification means capable of transmitting information indicating a stop operation condition of the stop operation means.
The lottery result includes
The first lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is the same in any of the plurality of types of set values, and
A second lottery result in which the probability of internal winning is different according to the plurality of types of set values is included.
The stop control means
When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition in the game from which the first lottery result is derived, the first display result is derived to the variable display unit.
When the stop operation means is operated according to a second stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition in the game from which the first lottery result is derived, the first display is displayed on the variable display unit. Derived a second display result that is different from the result,
When the stop operation means is operated in the game from which the second lottery result is derived, the means for deriving the first display result to the variable display unit regardless of the stop operation conditions of the stop operation means. can be,
The notification means is
When the first lottery result is derived, the first notification indicating the first stop operation condition can be notified in a predetermined notification mode.
When the second lottery result is derived, it is a means capable of notifying the second notification indicating the first stop operation condition in the predetermined notification mode.
The notification means reduces the execution frequency of the first notification when the condition for reducing the frequency of notification execution, which is satisfied at least in a part of the case where the stop operation according to the notification by the notification means is not performed, is satisfied. together, Ri means der to reduce the execution frequency of the second notification,
When the condition for lowering the notification execution frequency is satisfied, the notification means reduces the execution frequency of the first notification to the first frequency, and reduces the execution frequency of the second notification from the first frequency. Is also a means of reducing to a lower second frequency,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The second frequency is zero,
A game table characterized by that.

Images